Top Banner
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1 Model KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark.
428
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200.Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1

Model KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Hybrid IP-PBX

Installation Manual

SD Logo isa trademark.

Page 2: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

System Components

System Components Table for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Model Description

Shelves KX-TDA100 Basic Shelf

KX-TDA200 Basic Shelf

Main Processing Card Main Processing Card (MPR)

MPR Option Card KX-TDA0105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

KX-TDA0196 Remote Card (RMT)

Trunk Cards KX-TDA0180 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT8)

KX-TDA0181 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT16)

KX-TDA0182 8-Port DID Card (DID8)

KX-TDA0183 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

KX-TDA0184 8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8)

KX-TDA0187 T-1 Trunk Card (T1)

KX-TDA0188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1)

KX-TDA0189 8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (CID/PAY8)

KX-TDA0193 8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8)

KX-TDA0284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)

KX-TDA0288 8-Port BRI Card (BRI8)

KX-TDA0290CE/CJ PRI Card (PRI30)

KX-TDA0290 PRI Card (PRI23)

KX-TDA0480 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

KX-TDA0484 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)

Extension Cards KX-TDA0143 4 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF4)

KX-TDA0144 8 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF8)

KX-TDA0170 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC8)

KX-TDA0171 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

KX-TDA0172 16-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)

KX-TDA0173 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

KX-TDA0174 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC16)

KX-TDA0175 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card (MSLC16)

2 Installation Manual

Page 3: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Other Cards KX-TDA0161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

KX-TDA0162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

KX-TDA0166 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO16)

KX-TDA0190 Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3)

KX-TDA0191 4-Channel Message Card (MSG4)

KX-TDA0410 CTI Link Card (CTI-LINK)

Power Supply Units (PSUs)

KX-TDA0103 L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L)

KX-TDA0104 M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M)

KX-TDA0108 S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S)

Cell Stations (CSs) KX-TDA0141CE 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable Station

KX-TDA0141 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

KX-TDA0142CE 4-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for DECT Portable Station

KX-TDA0142 3-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

Proprietary Equipment KX-A228 S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable

KX-A229 L-type Back-up Battery Cable

KX-A258 Blank Slot Cover

KX-T30865 Doorphone

System Components Table for KX-TDA30

Model Description

Main Unit KX-TDA30 Main Unit

Trunk Cards KX-TDA3180 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

KX-TDA3182 4-Port DID Card (DID4)

KX-TDA3183 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT2)

KX-TDA3193 4-Port Caller ID Card (CID4)

KX-TDA3280 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2)

KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1)

KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

System Components Table for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Model Description

Installation Manual 3

Page 4: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Available Proprietary Telephones

The Hybrid IP-PBX supports all of the Panasonic KX-T7000, KX-TD7000, and KX-TCA series:

• Digital/Analogue proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636)

• Portable stations (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690, KX-TCA155, KX-TCA255)

• DSS consoles (e.g., KX-T7640)

• Single line telephones (e.g., KX-T7710)

NoteThe Hybrid IP-PBX does not support the following telephones:

• KX-T30800 series Proprietary Telephones and DSS consoles

• KX-T61600 series Proprietary Telephones and DSS consoles

• KX-T123200 series Proprietary Telephones and DSS consoles

• KX-TD7500 DECT Portable Station

For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset*1) that can be connected to a particular telephone, refer to the telephone's manual.

Extension Cards KX-TDA3171 4-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC4)

KX-TDA3172 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

KX-TDA3173 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC4)

KX-TDA3174 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

Other Cards KX-TDA3105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

KX-TDA3161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

KX-TDA3162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

KX-TDA3166 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO8)

KX-TDA3168 Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID)

KX-TDA3191 2-Channel Message Card (MSG2)

KX-TDA3196 Remote Card (RMT)

Cell Stations (CSs) KX-TDA0141CE 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC Card for DECT Portable Station

KX-TDA0141 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

Proprietary Equipment KX-A236 Additional AC Adaptor

KX-A228 S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable

KX-T30865 Doorphone

*1 The KX-T7090 headset can be connected to the KX-T7000, KX-T7200, KX-T7300, KX-T7400, and KX-T7500 (except for KX-T7560/KX-T7565) series telephones.

System Components Table for KX-TDA30

Model Description

4 Installation Manual

Page 5: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

For other equipment that can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "1.2.2 System Connection Diagram".

Abbreviations in this manual

Proprietary telephone: PT

Digital proprietary telephone: DPT

Analogue proprietary telephone: APT

Portable station: PS

Single line telephone: SLT

Notice

• There are some optional service cards and features that are not available for certain countries/areas. Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.

• The power supply capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX may differ from the values described in this manual depending on the model number. Please consult your dealer for detailed information.

• The KX-TDA100CN and KX-TDA200CN have a power supply unit (PSU-S and PSU-M, respectively) pre-installed.

Installation Manual 5

Page 6: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Important Safety InstructionsSAFETY REQUIREMENTS

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

3. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

4. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

5. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

6. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

7. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.

8. This product is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug, a plug having a third (earthing) pin. This plug will only fit into an earthing type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the earthing type plug.

9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by people walking on it.

10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

11. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified person when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.

13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

a) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

b) If liquid has been spilled into the product.

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

6 Installation Manual

Page 7: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Installation Manual 7

Page 8: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Precaution• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such

as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.

• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug an SLT into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the trouble is in the telephone network, and not in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• Do not use benzene, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

For users in Germany only

• When the unit is working, the noise is less than 70 dB (A) according to DIN 45635 Part 19.

For users in Finland, Norway and Sweden only (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)

• This unit may only be installed in a room or space with restricted access, and equipotential bonding must be applied. For information on earthing, refer to "2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection".

For users in New Zealand only• This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency

Service.

• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

• This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.

• Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PBX) associated with this modem. In order to operate within the limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications, the associated PBX equipment shall be sent to ensure that modem calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing.

• IMPORTANT NOTICEUnder power failure conditions, the wireless telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use in emergencies.

For users in Australia only

• No External TRC Terminal is provided due to an Internal Link between PE and TRC.

8 Installation Manual

Page 9: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

WARNING

• THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH EXPOSES ANY INTERNAL PARTS, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.

• DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.

• THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.

• TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

• THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE. ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.

CAUTIONDANGER OF EXPLOSION EXISTS IF THE BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE THE BATTERY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE BATTERY MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

MODEL No.:

SERIAL No.:

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the side of the unit. You should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.

Installation Manual 9

Page 10: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER'S ADDRESS

DEALER'S TEL. NO.

For your future reference

The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA30GR, and the KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the:• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access

The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, the KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, the KX-TDA100GR/KX-TDA200GR, and the KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the:• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate

access• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)

We, Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd., declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.If you would like to receive a copy of the original Declaration of Conformity of our products which relates to the R&TTE, please visit our web address:

http://doc.panasonic-tc.de

10 Installation Manual

Page 11: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

IntroductionThis Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX, KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200. It provides instructions for installing the hardware, and programming the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA30) or the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200).

The Structure of this ManualThis manual contains the following sections:

Section 1 System Outline — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200Provides general information on the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, including the system capacity and specifications.

Section 2 Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Describes the procedures to install the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.

Section 3 Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.

Section 4 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Provides information on the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 and telephone troubleshooting.

Section 5 System Outline — KX-TDA30Provides general information on the KX-TDA30, including the system capacity and specifications.

Section 6 Installation — KX-TDA30

Describes the procedures to install the KX-TDA30. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.

Section 7 Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console — KX-TDA30

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

Section 8 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30Provides information on the KX-TDA30 and telephone troubleshooting.

About the Other ManualsAlong with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:

Feature GuideDescribes all basic, optional and programmable features of the Hybrid IP-PBX, and step-by-step instruction for performing system programming using a proprietary telephone or a personal computer (PC).

User Manual

Provides operating instructions for end users using a PT, SLT, PS, or DSS Console.

Installation Manual 11

Page 12: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Trademarks• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.

• Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

12 Installation Manual

Page 13: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Precautions for Users in the United KingdomFOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR PREMISES, THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING

THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Green-and-yellow: Earth

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.The wire that is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug

that is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.

The wire that is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire that is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Installation Manual 13

Page 14: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.

This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.The equipment must be connected to direct exchange lines and a payphone should not be connected as an extension.

999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.

During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This is not a fault and we advise you not to call the Fault Repair Service.

14 Installation Manual

Page 15: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Table of Contents

<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>

1 System Outline — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ................................ 211.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................................221.1.1 System Highlights ....................................................................................................221.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200.....................................241.2.1 Basic Shelf ...............................................................................................................241.2.2 System Connection Diagram ...................................................................................251.3 Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200......................................................................271.3.1 Options.....................................................................................................................271.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ...........................................................301.4.1 General Description .................................................................................................301.4.2 Characteristics .........................................................................................................321.4.3 System Capacity ......................................................................................................33

2 Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................... 352.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ....................................................362.1.1 Before Installation ....................................................................................................362.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................382.2.1 Unpacking ................................................................................................................382.2.2 Names and Locations ..............................................................................................392.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover.............................................................................402.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit .............................................................422.2.5 Frame Earth Connection..........................................................................................462.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection...................................................................................472.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards......................................................482.2.8 Types of Connectors ................................................................................................532.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core...........................................................................................552.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector ......................................................................572.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA200)....................................................................................592.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA100)....................................................................................612.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only)...........................................................................632.2.14 Lightning Protector Installation.................................................................................662.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ...............692.3.1 MPR Card ................................................................................................................692.3.2 MEC Card ................................................................................................................712.3.3 RMT Card ................................................................................................................722.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200................................732.4.1 LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards .......................................................................732.4.2 DID8 Card ................................................................................................................752.4.3 CID/PAY8 Card.........................................................................................................772.4.4 CID8 Card ................................................................................................................782.4.5 E&M8 Card ..............................................................................................................792.4.6 T1 Card ....................................................................................................................822.4.7 E1 Card....................................................................................................................852.4.8 BRI4 and BRI8 Cards ..............................................................................................882.4.9 PRI30 Card ..............................................................................................................92

Installation Manual 15

Page 16: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4.10 PRI23 Card.............................................................................................................. 962.4.11 IP-GW4 Card........................................................................................................... 992.4.12 IP-GW4E Card ...................................................................................................... 1022.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200...................... 1042.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card ......................................................................................... 1042.5.2 DHLC8 Card.......................................................................................................... 1062.5.3 DLC8 Card ............................................................................................................ 1092.5.4 DLC16 Card .......................................................................................................... 1112.5.5 SLC8 Card............................................................................................................. 1132.5.6 SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards................................................................................... 1152.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................. 1172.6.1 OPB3 Card............................................................................................................ 1172.6.2 DPH4 Card............................................................................................................ 1182.6.3 DPH2 Card............................................................................................................ 1202.6.4 ECHO16 Card ....................................................................................................... 1232.6.5 MSG4 Card ........................................................................................................... 1242.6.6 CTI-LINK Card....................................................................................................... 1252.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................... 1272.7.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ................. 1272.7.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions................................................................... 1282.7.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .............................................. 1302.7.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection ................................................................ 1352.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............... 1362.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 1362.8.2 Procedure Overview.............................................................................................. 1382.8.3 Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 1402.8.4 Before Site Survey ................................................................................................ 1442.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590.................................................... 1482.8.6 After Site Survey ................................................................................................... 1522.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX ................................................... 1532.8.8 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 1622.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............ 1642.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 1642.9.2 Procedure Overview.............................................................................................. 1662.9.3 Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 1682.9.4 Before Site Survey ................................................................................................ 1722.9.5 Site Survey ............................................................................................................ 1742.9.6 After Site Survey ................................................................................................... 1782.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX ................................................... 1792.9.8 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 1872.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200......... 1892.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers..................................................... 1892.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................... 1922.11.1 Connection of Peripherals ..................................................................................... 1922.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200................................... 1962.12.1 Power Failure Connections.................................................................................... 1962.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ................................... 2002.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX.................................................................................... 200

16 Installation Manual

Page 17: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3 Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200......................................................................................... 203

3.1 Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .................................................................2043.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................2043.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200..............................................................2053.2.1 Connection.............................................................................................................2053.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200......2073.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console ....................................2073.3.2 Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console ....................................................2113.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration .................................................................................2123.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance ..................................................................................213

4 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 ............................ 2174.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 .....................................................2184.1.1 Installation..............................................................................................................2184.1.2 Connection.............................................................................................................2194.1.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................2214.1.4 Using the Reset Button ..........................................................................................2234.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log .................................................................................225

<KX-TDA30>

5 System Outline — KX-TDA30..................................................... 2355.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA30.........................................................................2365.1.1 System Highlights ..................................................................................................2365.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30 .........................................................2385.2.1 Main Unit................................................................................................................2385.2.2 System Connection Diagram .................................................................................2395.3 Options — KX-TDA30 ..........................................................................................2415.3.1 Options...................................................................................................................2415.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30................................................................................2435.4.1 General Description ...............................................................................................2435.4.2 Characteristics .......................................................................................................2455.4.3 System Capacity ....................................................................................................246

6 Installation — KX-TDA30............................................................ 2496.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA30.........................................................................2506.1.1 Before Installation ..................................................................................................2506.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30.................................................2526.2.1 Unpacking ..............................................................................................................2526.2.2 Names and Locations ............................................................................................2536.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers ..................................................................................2546.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card.......................................................................2576.2.5 Frame Earth Connection........................................................................................2586.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection.................................................................................2596.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards....................................................2606.2.8 Types of Connectors ..............................................................................................2706.2.9 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)....................................................................................2726.2.10 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor) ..................................................................................2756.2.11 Lightning Protector Installation...............................................................................278

Installation Manual 17

Page 18: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30.................................................... 2816.3.1 LCOT4 Card .......................................................................................................... 2816.3.2 LCOT2 Card .......................................................................................................... 2836.3.3 DID4 Card ............................................................................................................. 2846.3.4 CID4 Card ............................................................................................................. 2856.3.5 BRI2 Card.............................................................................................................. 2866.3.6 BRI1 Card.............................................................................................................. 2896.3.7 IP-GW4 Card......................................................................................................... 2926.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30 ............................................ 2946.4.1 DLC4 Card ............................................................................................................ 2946.4.2 SLC4 Card............................................................................................................. 2966.4.3 DLC8 Card ............................................................................................................ 2976.4.4 SLC8 Card............................................................................................................. 2996.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30.................................................... 3006.5.1 DPH4 Card............................................................................................................ 3006.5.2 DPH2 Card............................................................................................................ 3036.5.3 ECHO8 Card ......................................................................................................... 3066.5.4 MSG2 Card ........................................................................................................... 3076.5.5 EXT-CID Card........................................................................................................ 3086.5.6 MEC Card.............................................................................................................. 3096.5.7 RMT Card.............................................................................................................. 3116.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30........................................................... 3136.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ................. 3136.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions................................................................... 3146.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .............................................. 3166.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection ................................................................ 3216.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30...................................... 3226.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3226.7.2 Procedure Overview.............................................................................................. 3246.7.3 Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 3266.7.4 Before Site Survey ................................................................................................ 3306.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590.................................................... 3346.7.6 After Site Survey ................................................................................................... 3386.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX ................................................... 3396.7.8 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 3466.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30 .................................. 3486.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3486.8.2 Procedure Overview.............................................................................................. 3496.8.3 Site Planning ......................................................................................................... 3516.8.4 Before Site Survey ................................................................................................ 3556.8.5 Site Survey ............................................................................................................ 3576.8.6 After Site Survey ................................................................................................... 3616.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX ................................................... 3626.8.8 Wall Mounting........................................................................................................ 3686.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30......................... 3706.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers..................................................... 3706.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30........................................................... 3806.10.1 Connection of Peripherals ..................................................................................... 3806.11 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA30 ......................................................... 3846.11.1 Power Failure Connections.................................................................................... 384

18 Installation Manual

Page 19: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30 ..........................................................3866.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX ....................................................................................386

7 Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console — KX-TDA30 ..... 3917.1 Overview — KX-TDA30 ........................................................................................3927.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................3927.2 Connection — KX-TDA30 ....................................................................................3937.2.1 Connection.............................................................................................................3937.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.........................................3957.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console ................................3957.3.2 Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console ................................................3997.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration .................................................................................4007.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance ..................................................................................401

8 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30................................................... 4038.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30 ............................................................................4048.1.1 Installation..............................................................................................................4048.1.2 Connection.............................................................................................................4058.1.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................4078.1.4 Using the Reset Button ..........................................................................................4098.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log .................................................................................411

Index .................................................................................................. 421

Installation Manual 19

Page 20: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

20 Installation Manual

Page 21: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 1

System Outline — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

This section provides general information on the Hybrid IP-PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.

Installation Manual 21

Page 22: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.1.1 System Highlights

Networking FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following networking features:

TIE Line Service

A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between 2 or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations.

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line.

QSIG NetworkQSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network.

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.

Built-in Small Call Centre FeaturesAn incoming call distribution group can be used as a small call centre with the following features:

Queuing Feature

When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

Log-in/Log-outIncoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up).

VIP CallIt is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) FeaturesConnecting a personal computer (PC) to this Hybrid IP-PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC.

Voice Mail FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT (Digital) Integration.

22 Installation Manual

Page 23: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Parallelled Telephone FeaturesBy connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards.

Parallel Mode

An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) ModeAn SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Digital XDP

A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Portable Station (PS) FeaturesPSs (e.g., KX-TD7690) can be connected to this Hybrid IP-PBX. It is possible to use the Hybrid IP-PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone.

PC Phone/PC Console FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features.

Installation Manual 23

Page 24: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.2.1 Basic Shelf

The basic shelf contains an MPR card. For system expansion, optional service cards and a power supply unit can be installed in the basic shelf.

Construction of Basic Shelf

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

B B

A A

A: Slots for Expansion

B: MPR Card

24 Installation Manual

Page 25: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

Doorphone & Door Opener

BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)

Pager/Speaker

Batteries

Voice Processing System

KX-T7636/KX-T7633

Remote PC

PC

Printer

Router

Private IP NetworkTrunk (Telephone Company Lines)

Analogue/BRI/PRI/T1/E1

Hybrid IP-PBX

PC

SLT

CSPS

Wireless Phone

Fax Machine

PC

USB

APT

DPT

ISDN Telephone

Amplifier

Server PC

PC

PC

SLT

DPT

DSS Console

DSS Console

KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT

Installation Manual 25

Page 26: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

*1 The KX-TDA100CN and KX-TDA200CN have a power supply unit (PSU-S and PSU-M, respectively) pre-installed.

*2 Only 1 Server PC can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Two or more Server PCs cannot be used simultaneously.

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

CS PS

PCKX-T7636/KX-T7633 DSSConsole

Doorphone & Door Opener

PT-interface CS PS

Private IP Network

Station MessageDetail Recording (SMDR)

PC

Router

ISDN BRI LineISDN BRI Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)ISDN BRI Line(Digital Trunk)

ISDN PRI LineISDN PRI Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)ISDN PRI Line(Digital Trunk)

T1 LineT1 Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)

T1 Line(Digital Trunk)

LCOT16(KX-TDA0181)

LCOT8(KX-TDA0180)

LCOT4(KX-TDA0183)

DLC16(KX-TDA0172)

DLC8(KX-TDA0171)

DHLC8(KX-TDA0170)

MSLC16(KX-TDA0175)

SLC16(KX-TDA0174)

SLC8(KX-TDA0173)

CSIF4(KX-TDA0143)

CSIF8(KX-TDA0144)

CTI-LINK(KX-TDA0410)

OPB3(KX-TDA0190)E1

(KX-TDA0188)

IP-GW4(KX-TDA0480)

IP-GW4E(KX-TDA0484)

PRI30(KX-TDA0290

CE/CJ)

PRI23(KX-TDA0290)

BRI4(KX-TDA0284)

BRI8(KX-TDA0288)

T1(KX-TDA0187)

E&M8(KX-TDA0184)

DID8(KX-TDA0182)

AnalogueAnalogueTrunkTrunk

AnalogueTrunk

E & M LineE & M LineE & M Line

E1 LineE1 Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)

E1 Line(Digital Trunk)

TelephoneCompany

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

Hybrid IP-PBX

Mountable Equipment

DPT

APT DPT DSS Console

PT-interface CS PSVoice Processing System

Batteries

PSU-S/M/L*1

(KX-TDA0108/KX-TDA0104/KX-TDA0103)

Radio

Amplifier Pager/Speaker

Server PC*2

PC

LAN

Server PC*2

DPH4(KX-TDA0161)

DPH2(KX-TDA0162)

ECHO16(KX-TDA0166)

MSG4(KX-TDA0191)

CID/PAY8(KX-TDA0189)

CID8(KX-TDA0193)

MPR(Installed by default)

RMT(KX-TDA0196)

MEC(KX-TDA0105)

KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT

26 Installation Manual

Page 27: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.3 Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.3 Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.3.1 Options

Model No. Model Name DescriptionMaximum Quantity

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

KX-TDA0105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

Memory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using Digital XDP connection. To be installed in the MEC slot.

1 1

KX-TDA0143 4 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF4)

4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs. 2 4

KX-TDA0144 8 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF8)

8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs. 2 4

KX-TDA0161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

2 4

KX-TDA0162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

4 8

KX-TDA0166 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO16)

16-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

2 2

KX-TDA0170 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC8)

8-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs, with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

KX-TDA0171 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

4 8

KX-TDA0172 16-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)

16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

4 8

KX-TDA0173 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

8-port extension card for SLTs with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

KX-TDA0174 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC16)

16-port extension card for SLTs with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

Installation Manual 27

Page 28: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.3 Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

KX-TDA0175 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card (MSLC16)

16-port extension card for SLTs with Message Waiting Lamp control and 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 160 V/90 V for Message Waiting Lamp control.

4 8

KX-TDA0180 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT8)

8-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

KX-TDA0181 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT16)

16-port analogue trunk card with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

KX-TDA0182 8-Port DID Card (DID8)

8-port DID trunk card. 4 8

KX-TDA0183 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

4 8

KX-TDA0184 8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8)

8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type 5 support.

4 8

KX-TDA0187 T-1 Trunk Card (T1) 1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA standard compliant.

2 4

KX-TDA0188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1) 1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.

2 4

KX-TDA0189 8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (CID/PAY8)

8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and 8 ports of Pay Tone Service (12 kHz/16 kHz). To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.

8 16

KX-TDA0190 Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3)

Optional 3-slot base card for mounting a maximum of 3 option cards from the following: MSG4, DPH4, DPH2, or ECHO16 card.

2 4

KX-TDA0191 4-Channel Message Card (MSG4)

4-channel message card. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

2 4

KX-TDA0193 8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8)

8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.

8 16

KX-TDA0196 Remote Card (RMT) Analogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be mounted on the MPR card.

1 1

KX-TDA0284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)

4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

4 8

Model No. Model Name DescriptionMaximum Quantity

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

28 Installation Manual

Page 29: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.3 Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

KX-TDA0288 8-Port BRI Card (BRI8)

8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

4 8

KX-TDA0290CE/CJ

PRI Card (PRI30) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

2 4

KX-TDA0290 PRI Card (PRI23) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN protocol) compliant.

2 4

KX-TDA0410 CTI Link Card (CTI-LINK)

Ethernet card for CTI communication via 10BASE-T port. CSTA Phase 3 protocol compatible.

1 1

KX-TDA0480 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, and G.723.1 compliant. G3 fax support.

2 4

KX-TDA0484 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)

4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1, and G.711 compliant.

2 4

KX-TDA0103 L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L)

Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA200. Total power output of 279 W. Safety Class 1 compliant.

– 1

KX-TDA0104 M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M)

Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200. Total power output of 140.4 W. Safety Class 1 compliant.

1 1

KX-TDA0108 S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S)

Power Supply Unit for KX-TDA100. Total power output of 74 W. Safety Class 1 compliant.

1 –

Model No. Model Name DescriptionMaximum Quantity

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

Installation Manual 29

Page 30: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.4.1 General Description

Control Bus Original bus (16-bit, 8 MHz, 10 megabytes per second)

Communication Bus H.100 bus conformity (1024 time slot)

Switching Non-blocking

Power Input PSU-S 100 V AC to 130 V AC, 1.4 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC, 0.8 A,50 Hz/60 Hz

PSU-M 100 V AC to 130 V AC, 2.5 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC, 1.4 A,50 Hz/60 Hz

PSU-L 100 V AC to 130 V AC, 5.1 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC, 2.55 A,50 Hz/60 Hz

External Battery +36 V DC (+12 V DC × 3, battery capacity of 28 Ah or below recommended for each external battery)

Maximum Power Failure Tolerance 300 ms (without using backup batteries)

Memory Backup Duration 7 years

Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP

Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 maximum

Operating Environment

Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C

Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)

Conference Call Trunk From 10 × 3-party conference call to 4 × 8-party conference call

Music on Hold (MOH) 2 ports (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)MOH1: External Music Source portMOH2: Selectable Internal/External Music Source port

Paging Internal Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps

External 2 ports (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)

Serial Interface Port RS-232C 1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)

USB 1

30 Installation Manual

Page 31: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)

DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2) or2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)

DSS Console and Add-on Key Module

1-pair wire (D1, D2)

Dimension KX-TDA100 334 mm (W) × 390 mm (H) × 270 mm (D)

KX-TDA200 430 mm (W) × 415 mm (H) × 270 mm (D)

Weight (when fully mounted)

KX-TDA100 Under 12 kg

KX-TDA200 Under 16 kg

Installation Manual 31

Page 32: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.4.2 Characteristics

Terminal Equipment Loop Limit • PT: KX-T7600 series: 90 ; all other DPTs/APTs: 40

• SLT: 600 including set

• Doorphone: 20

• CS: 130 ; PT-interface CS: 65

Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 minimum

Maximum Number of Extension Instruments per Line

1 for PT or SLT

2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of a PT and an SLT

3 by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of two DPTs and an SLT

Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 maximum

Hookswitch Flash/Recall Timing Range

24 ms to 2032 ms

BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode Supply Voltage: 40 VPower Supply: 4.5 W per 1 line, 10 W per 4 lines (BRI4)

4.5 W per 1 line, 20 W per 8 lines (BRI8)Power Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply

Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

Paging Terminal Impedance 600

MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal Impedance

10 000

32 Installation Manual

Page 33: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1.4.3 System Capacity

Maximum Trunk and Extension CardsThe following number of trunk and extension cards can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX for expansion.

Notes• For each card, the maximum number that can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX is

listed in "1.3.1 Options".

• Any card that exceeds the capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX will be ignored.

• When the Hybrid IP-PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.

Maximum Terminal EquipmentThe following number of terminal equipment can be supported by the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Card Type KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

Trunk Card*1

*1 One T1, E1, PRI30, PRI23, or IP-GW4 card counts as 2 cards.

4 8

Extension Card 4 8

Total 5 10

Terminal Equipment Type KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

Without an MEC Card

With an MEC Card

Without an MEC Card

With an MEC Card

Telephone*1

*1 A single "T1-OPX (Off Premise Extension) port" or "BRI/PRI extension port" is counted as a wired telephone.

88 152 176 304

SLT and PT 64 128 128 256

SLT 64 64 128 128

PT 64 128 128 256

CS 32 32

PS 128 128

Voice Processing System (VPS)

2 2

Doorphone 8 16

Door Opener 8 16

Add-on Key Module 64 128 128 256

USB Module 64 128

Installation Manual 33

Page 34: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

1.4 Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Power Supply Unit SelectionHybrid IP-PBX needs an optional power supply unit (PSU) suitable for its configuration. Calculate the amount of "load figures" from the type and number of equipment to be connected, and determine the type of PSU that will be required.

Load Figure Calculation

PSU CapabilityEach PSU supports a different amount of load figures.

Equipment Type Load Figure

PT KX-T7600 series DPT/DSS console and KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT

1

APT and other DPT/DSS console

4

Extension Card*1

*1 Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the load figures.

DHLC8 8

SLC8 8

SLC16 16

MSLC16 16

CS 4

ISDN Extension 2

VPS 1

PSU Type Maximum Load Figures

PSU-S*1

*1 Available for the KX-TDA100

64

PSU-M*2

*2 Available for the KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200

128

PSU-L*3

*3 Available for the KX-TDA200

512

34 Installation Manual

Page 35: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 2

Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

This section describes the procedures to install the Hybrid IP-PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.

Installation Manual 35

Page 36: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.1.1 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the Hybrid IP-PBX. Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

Safety Installation InstructionsWhen installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

5. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.

Installation PrecautionsThis set is made for wall mounting (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or floor standing (KX-TDA200 only). Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discolouration.)

1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places.Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C

2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.

3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.

4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.

5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.

6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment.)

7. Closer than 1.8 m to radios and televisions (both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PTs).

8. Do not obstruct the area around the Hybrid IP-PBX (for reasons of maintenance and inspection—be especially careful to allow at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of the Hybrid IP-PBX for cooling).

9. Do not block the openings at top of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

10. Do not stack up the optional service cards.

Wiring PrecautionsBe sure to follow these instructions when wiring.

1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.

36 Installation Manual

Page 37: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on. Avoid wiring under carpets.

3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the Hybrid IP-PBX operation may be interrupted by the inducted noise from such equipment.

4. Please use 1-pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such as standard telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, Voice Processing Systems, etc., except PTs (e.g., KX-T7600 series).

5. The power switch and battery switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be off during wiring. After the wiring is completed, turn the power switch on.

6. Mis-wiring may cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to operate improperly.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX off and on again.

8. The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing-type plug.

9. Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.

10. Trunks should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to "2.2.14 Lightning Protector Installation".

Installation Manual 37

Page 38: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.1 Unpacking

Unpack the box and check the items below:

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

Main Unit 1 1

AC Cord with a Ferrite Core*1

*1 In Canada, there is no ferrite core attached to the AC cord.

1 1

Metal Bracket 1 1

Screw A 3 4

Screw B (Black) 2 6

Anchor Plug 3 4

Mini Plug (for pager and music source) 4 4

SD Memory Card 1 1

38 Installation Manual

Page 39: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.2 Names and Locations

Inside View

Note

* Null slot is not available for any optional service card.

MPR Card Slot

RUN Indicator

ALARM Indicator

RS-232C Port

Free Slots 1 to 5

Free Slots 1 to 10

USB Port

RS-232C Port

USB Port

RUN Indicator

ALARM Indicator

MPR Card SlotNull Slot*

PSU Slot PSU Slot

Option Card Slot

Option Card Slot

KX-TDA100 KX-TDA200

Installation Manual 39

Page 40: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover

Opening the Front Cover1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the opening (on the left of the screw cover) and unlatch

the screw cover.

2. Turn the screw anticlockwise to loosen.

3. Slide the front cover to the right until it stops, then lift the front cover.

Screw Cover

40 Installation Manual

Page 41: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Closing the Front Cover1. Hook the front cover onto the cabinet (line up the protrusions on the cover with the

receptacles on the cabinet). Then slide the front cover to the left until it locks.

2. Turn the screw clockwise to tighten.

3. Secure the screw cover.

Notes

• For safety reasons, close the front cover and tighten the screw when the Hybrid IP-PBX is in operation.

• Do not forget to tighten the screw before securing the screw cover.

1

2

Installation Manual 41

Page 42: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

Function

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 4

User-supplied (not included): earthing wire, Back-up Battery Cable (KX-A228 for PSU-S and PSU-M, or KX-A229 for PSU-L)

Notes• For details about frame earth connection, refer to "2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection".

• For details about backup batteries connection, refer to "2.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection".

Safety InstructionsEach PSU complies with Safety Class 1 of IEC60950, EN60950, UL60950,CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950, and AS/NZS60950; therefore a protective earth connection exists between the mains outlet ground and the PSU case. To ensure the PBX chassis is safely grounded, it is essential that the PSU case be securely fastened to the PBX chassis with the 4 screws provided with each PSU.

When installing or replacing PSU, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

PSU Type Lower/Upper Input Voltage Range Current Input Frequency

PSU-S(for KX-TDA100)

Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 1.4 A

50 Hz or 60 Hz

Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 0.8 A

PSU-M(for KX-TDA100/200)

Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 2.5 A

Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 1.4 A

PSU-L(for KX-TDA200)

Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 5.1 A

Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 2.55 A

AC InletPower Switch

AC Inlet

Power Switch

PSU-S PSU-M/PSU-L

Battery Switch

Earth Terminal

Battery Switch

Earth Terminal

Battery ConnectorBattery Connector

42 Installation Manual

Page 43: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1. Never install or replace PSU during a lightning storm.

2. Never install or replace PSU in wet locations.

3. Never install or replace PSU unless at least 20 s has elapsed after the AC supply and backup battery supply are disconnected.

4. To protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board in the main unit and PSU. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

The following procedures are for installing or replacing a PSU only. Do not replace or remove the PSU for any other purpose.

Installing the Power Supply Unit1. Insert the PSU along the guide rails.

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, do not touch parts in the PSU.

Guide Rail

Installation Manual 43

Page 44: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Push the release lever in the direction of the arrow, so that the PSU engages securely with the connector on the back board.

3. Turn the 4 screws clockwise, in the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4, to fix the PSU.

Replacing the Power Supply Unit1. Unplug the AC power cord and Back-up Battery Cable.

Release Lever

Back Board

Screws

1

3 2

4

44 Installation Manual

Page 45: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Turn the 4 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.

3. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the PSU from the back board.

4. Replace the PSU.

5. Follow the steps in "Installing the Power Supply Unit".

Screws

Release Lever

Back Board

Current PSUNew PSU

Installation Manual 45

Page 46: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection

IMPORTANTConnect the frame of the Hybrid IP-PBX to earth.

• Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX from the bad effects of external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the case of lightning strike.

• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against the external noise and lightning strikes, but it may not be enough to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX. A permanent connection between earth and the earth terminal of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be made.

1. Loosen the screw.

2. Insert an earthing wire (user-supplied)*.

3. Tighten the screw.

4. Connect the earthing wire to earth.

* For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.

Screw

To earth

Earthing wire

46 Installation Manual

Page 47: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable (KX-A228 for PSU-S and PSU-M, or KX-A229 for PSU-L) provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the Hybrid IP-PBX in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX without interruption.

1. Turn off the battery switch on the PSU.

2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable with 3 identical VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries (12 V DC × 3).

• Turn on the battery switch on the PSU only after the installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX is finished and AC power is available.

• For each backup battery, battery capacity of 28 Ah or below is recommended (otherwise, the battery charge may not be maintained).

• Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.

• The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up Battery Cable and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the backup batteries in ventilated place.

• For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual intended for the batteries.

CAUTION• Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

• Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.

• Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.

• There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

• Use the correct type of Back-up Battery Cable for the type of the PSU.

Back-up Battery Cable

Backup Batteries (12 V DC x 3)

Red Black

Battery ConnectorBattery Switch

ON

OFF

Fuse

Installation Manual 47

Page 48: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Slot Condition

CAUTIONTo protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board in the main unit and on the optional service cards. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

Note

The optional service cards can be installed or removed while the DC power is supplied. However, when installing or removing the MPR card, the DC power supply must be turned off.

Installing Optional Service Cards1. Insert the card along the guide rails.

Card Type Slot Type

KX-TDA100: Free Slots 1 to 5KX-TDA200: Free Slots 1 to 10

Option Slot MPR Slot

MPR Card No No Yes

Trunk Cards Yes No No

Extension Cards Yes No No

OPB3 Card Yes Yes No

CTI-LINK Card Yes Yes No

Guide Rail

48 Installation Manual

Page 49: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Holding the card as shown below, push the release lever in the direction of the arrow so that the card engages securely with the connector on the back board.

3. Turn the 2 screws clockwise to fix the card in place.

NoteMake sure the screws are tightened to earth the card securely.

Release Lever

Back Board

Screws

Installation Manual 49

Page 50: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Covering the Blank SlotsBe sure to cover each slot in which no optional service card is installed by using a Blank Slot Cover.

CAUTIONFailure to install the Blank Slot Cover may cause electromagnetic interferences.

50 Installation Manual

Page 51: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Handling of the CablesWhen cables are connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, run the cables to either right or left and then towards the backside of the cabinet as shown below.

Note

For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.

3

4

1

2

Installation Manual 51

Page 52: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Removing the Optional Service Cards1. Turn the 2 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.

2. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the card from the back board. Pull the card from the cabinet to remove it.

Screws

Release Lever

Back Board

52 Installation Manual

Page 53: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.8 Types of Connectors

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

(Twisted pair cable)

• DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)

• SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)

• SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)

• MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)

• LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)

• LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)

• LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)

(Twisted pair cable)

• CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)

• CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)

• T1 (KX-TDA0187)

• E1 (KX-TDA0188)

• BRI4 (KX-TDA0284)

• BRI8 (KX-TDA0288)

• PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ)

• PRI23 (KX-TDA0290)

• CTI-LINK (KX-TDA0410)

• IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)

• IP-GW4E (KX-TDA0484)

• E1 (KX-TDA0188)

• PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ)

(Shielded twisted pair cable)

• DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)

• DLC8 (KX-TDA0171)

• DLC16 (KX-TDA0172)

• SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)

• SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)

• MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)

• LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)

• LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)

• DID8 (KX-TDA0182)

• LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)

• E&M8 (KX-TDA0184)

RJ11

1

4

RJ45

8

1

BNC

1

2

Amphenol

Type A Type B

50 25

26 1

Installation Manual 53

Page 54: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

• DPH4 (KX-TDA0161)

• DPH2 (KX-TDA0162)

• IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)

• Basic Shelf

• MPR

• MPR

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

10-pinTerminalBlock

8-pinTerminalBlock

8

1

10

1

RS-232C

9 5

6 1

USB

2

1

3

4

Mini Plug

2

4

54 Installation Manual

Page 55: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

A ferrite core must be attached when:

• connecting T1, E1, PRI, and BRI cards using an RJ45 connector (except in Canada, where the ferrite core is not necessarily required), or

• connecting extension cards using an Amphenol connector.

The ferrite core is included with the card.

When connecting a T1/E1/PRI cardWrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 5 cm away from the connector.

When connecting a BRI cardAttach the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core as close to the card’s connector as possible.

5 cm

When only 1 or 2 cables are used for connection, wrap the cable(s) once around the ferrite core.

When 3 or 4 cables are used for connection, simply pass the cables through the ferrite core.

Installation Manual 55

Page 56: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

NoteFor every 4 cables, use 1 ferrite core; a ferrite core holds a maximum of 4 cables.

When connecting an extension cardPass the cable through the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 3 cm away from the connector.

If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the ferrite core.

3 cm

56 Installation Manual

Page 57: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector

An Amphenol 57JE type connector is used on some of the optional service cards.To connect an Amphenol connector, use the spring latch or screw to fix the upper part and use Velcro® tape to fix the lower part of the connector.

Type A (Spring Latch + Velcro Tape) Type B (Screw + Velcro Tape)

Velcro Tape

Velcro Tape

2

1

2

2

1SpringLatch

1SpringLatch

Remove the screw on the optional service card.

Insert the screw (included with the Amphenol or optional service card).

Installation Manual 57

Page 58: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Amphenol Connector Pin Assignment ChartBelow is an Amphenol connector pin assignment chart for all optional service cards that use the Amphenol connector. For more details, refer to the appropriate section in "2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200" and "2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200".

Pin No. LCOT4 LCOT8 LCOT16 DID8 E&M8 DHLC8 DLC8 DLC16 MSLC16 SLC16 SLC81 RA RA RA RA TA RA D2A RA RA RA

26 TA TA TA TA RA TA D1A TA TA TA2 RB RB RB RB T1A D2A D2A D2B RB RB

27 TB TB TB TB R1A D1A D1A D1B TB TB3 RC RC RC RC EA D2C RC RC

28 TC TC TC TC MA D1C TC TC4 RD RD RD RD SGA RB D2D RD RD RB

29 TD TD TD TD SGB TB D1D TD TD TB5 RE RE RE TB D2B D2B D2E RE RE

30 TE TE TE RB D1B D1B D1E TE TE6 RF RF RF T1B D2F RF RF

31 TF TF TF R1B D1F TF TF7 RG RG RG EB RC D2G RG RG RC

32 TG TG TG MB TC D1G TG TG TC8 RH RH RH TC D2C D2C D2H RH RH

33 TH TH TH RC D1C D1C D1H TH TH9 RI T1C D2I RI RI

34 TI R1C D1I TI TI10 RJ EC RD D2J RJ RJ RD

35 TJ MC TD D1J TJ TJ TD11 RK TD D2D D2D D2K RK RK

36 TK RD D1D D1D D1K TK TK12 RL T1D D2L RL RL

37 TL R1D D1L TL TL13 RM ED RE D2M RM RM RE

38 TM MD TE D1M TM TM TE14 RN TE D2E D2E D2N RN RN

39 TN RE D1E D1E D1N TN TN15 RO T1E D2O RO RO

40 TO R1E D1O TO TO16 RP EE RF D2P RP RP RF

41 TP ME TF D1P TP TP TF17 TF D2F D2F

42 RF D1F D1F18 T1F

43 R1F19 EF RG RG

44 MF TG TG20 TG D2G D2G

45 RG D1G D1G21 T1G

46 R1G22 EG RH RH 47 MG TH TH

23 TH D2H D2H 48 RH D1H D1H

24 T1H49 R1H

25 EH50 MH

58 Installation Manual

Page 59: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA200)

CAUTIONDrive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal plates in the wall.

1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 4 screws (A).

Screw (A)

Screw (A)

Metal Bracket

Hammer Anchor Plug

30 mm

6.5 mm

Wall

TOPTOP

Anchor Plug

Metal Bracket

Installation Manual 59

Page 60: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Hook the cabinet onto the metal bracket, making sure that the unit slides down and onto the hooked parts of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the cabinet.

Notes

• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of the cabinet.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is not made of wood.

• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

TOP

Screw (B)

60 Installation Manual

Page 61: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA100)

CAUTIONDrive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal plates in the wall.

1. Install 3 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 3 screws (A).

Metal Bracket

Screw (A)

Anchor Plug

Wall

TOP

TOP

Screw (A)

Hammer Anchor Plug

30 mm

6.5 mm

Metal Bracket

Installation Manual 61

Page 62: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Hook the cabinet onto the metal bracket, making sure that the unit slides down and onto the hooked parts of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the cabinet.

Notes• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10

cm at the sides of the cabinet.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is not made of wood.

• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

TOP

Screw (B)

62 Installation Manual

Page 63: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only)

1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the floor, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 4 screws (A).

2. Remove the front cover of the cabinet (refer to "2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").

Anchor Plug

Hammer

30 mm

6.5 mm

MetalBracket

Screw (A)

Floor

Screw (A) Metal Bracket

AnchorPlug

TOP

Installation Manual 63

Page 64: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3. Lift the cabinet, attach it to the metal bracket, slide it backwards until it locks, and retain it with 2 screws (B).

Notes• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10

cm at the sides of the cabinet.

• Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

Screws (B)

Metal Bracket

FRONT

TOP

1

2

64 Installation Manual

Page 65: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

• Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is not made of wood.

• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

4. Fix the front cover on the cabinet (refer to "2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").

Installation Manual 65

Page 66: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.2.14 Lightning Protector Installation

OverviewA lightning protector is a device that must be installed on a trunk to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging equipment.

A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Trouble due to lightning surges has been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic equipment.

In many countries/areas, there are regulations requiring the installation of lightning protection. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.

The Hybrid IP-PBX must be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, earthing (connection to earth) is very important for the protection of the user.

Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

Recommended Lightning Protectors• KX-A207

• TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• Krone 237A strips fitted with 14A/1 surge arrestors

• Super MAX™ (PANAMAX)

• MP1 (ITW LINK)

Installation

CS

Trunk Trunk Trunk

Extn.

Extn. Extn.

Extn.: Extension line

LightningProtectors

TerminalBoard

HybridIP-PBX

FrameEarthSLT

Earth

PT

66 Installation Manual

Page 67: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Outside Installation

If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:

a. Install the extension wire underground.

b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.

Note

The lightning protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.

Installation of an Earth Rod

1. Installation location of the earth rod.....Near the protector

CSSLT PT

(Main Building)

Trunk

Trunk

Extn.

Extn.

Extn.: Extension Line

Earth

(Another Building)

Extn. Extn.

Lightning Protectors

TerminalBoard Lightning

Protector

SLTPT

HybridIP-PBX CS

Trunk

HybridIP-PBX

EarthingWire

Earth Rod(Underground)

Lightning Protector

Installation Manual 67

Page 68: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Check obstructions.....None

3. Composition of the earth rod.....Metal

4. Depth of the earth rod.....More than 50 cm

5. Cross sectional area of the earthing wire.....More than 1.3 mm2

Notes

• The above figures are recommendations only.

• The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

68 Installation Manual

Page 69: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.3.1 MPR Card

FunctionContains the main processor for all processes, basic shelf main protocol, time switch (TSW) control, detection of system clock alarm, basic shelf power down alarm, and watchdog timer overflow. An MEC card and an RMT card can be mounted on the MPR card (refer to "2.3.2 MEC Card" and "2.3.3 RMT Card").

Notes• For details about connecting peripherals, refer to "2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals".

• For details about System Initialise Switch, refer to "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

• For details about Reset Button, refer to "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button".

CAUTION• Use only the SD Memory Card included with the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the Hybrid IP-PBX and all the customer data. The SD Memory Card must be inserted before start up.

LEDs

Reset Button

SD Memory CardSlot Cover

System InitialiseSwitch

USB

BGM/MOH

Pager

SDCARD

2

SDCARD

4

5

SDCARD

SDMemoryCard 3

1

Installation Manual 69

Page 70: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card during the operation of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Removing the SD Memory Card during operation may cause damage to the SD Memory Card, or result in loss of data.

• A LITHIUM BATTERY IS USED IN THE MPR CARD. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH THE INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

BATT ALARM Red Battery alarm indication

• OFF: NormalON: Alarm

SD ACCESS Green SD memory card status

• ON: Accessing

70 Installation Manual

Page 71: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.3.2 MEC Card

FunctionMemory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using Digital XDP connection. To be installed in the MEC slot.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): none

MEC Card

Screw

inside

Installation Manual 71

Page 72: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.3 Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.3.3 RMT Card

FunctionAnalogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be mounted on the MPR card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): none

RMT Card

Screw

inside

72 Installation Manual

Page 73: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.1 LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards

Function

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type

Connector".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

LCOT4: 4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.LCOT8: 8-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID8 or

CID/PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card (refer to "2.4.3 CID/PAY8 Card" and "2.4.4 CID8 Card").

LCOT16: 16-port analogue trunk card with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. A maximum of 2 CID8 and CID/PAY8 cards can be mounted on the LCOT16 card (refer to "2.4.3 CID/PAY8 Card" and "2.4.4 CID8 Card").

Amphenol

To trunk

LED

Installation Manual 73

Page 74: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

Notes• Pin assignments for the pins 5 to 8 and 30 to 33 are for the LCOT8 and LCOT16 card

only.

• Pin assignments for the pins 9 to 16 and 34 to 41 are for the LCOT16 card only.

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1

2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2

3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3

4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4

5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5

6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6

7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7

8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8

9 RI Ring port 9 34 TI Tip port 9

10 RJ Ring port 10 35 TJ Tip port 10

11 RK Ring port 11 36 TK Tip port 11

12 RL Ring port 12 37 TL Tip port 12

13 RM Ring port 13 38 TM Tip port 13

14 RN Ring port 14 39 TN Tip port 14

15 RO Ring port 15 40 TO Tip port 15

16 RP Ring port 16 41 TP Tip port 16

17-25

Reserved – 42-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

74 Installation Manual

Page 75: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.2 DID8 Card

Function8-port DID trunk card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type

Connector".

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

To DID line

LED

Amphenol

Installation Manual 75

Page 76: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1

2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2

3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3

4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4

5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5

6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6

7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7

8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8

9-25

Reserved – 34-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

76 Installation Manual

Page 77: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.3 CID/PAY8 Card

Function8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and 8 ports of Pay Tone Service (12 kHz/16 kHz). To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): none

NoteOnly 1 CID/PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.

Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Port Setting DIP Set all DIP switches at "OFF" positions.

Note

SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.

CID/PAY8 Card

inside

Screw

Set all DIP switches for ports 01-08 at "OFF" positions.

Set all DIP switches for ports 09-16 at "OFF" positions (LCOT16 card only).

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

O

FF

ON

O

FF SW

2

SW

2

Ports 09-16

Ports 01-08

SW1 SW1

Installation Manual 77

Page 78: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.4 CID8 Card

Function8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): none

Note

Only 1 CID8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.

Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Port Setting DIP Keep all DIP switches at default "ON" positions. Do not change the positions of these switches.

Note

SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.

CID8 Card

inside

Screw

OFF

ON

ON

O

FF SW

2

LCOT16 card only

SW1

78 Installation Manual

Page 79: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.5 E&M8 Card

Function8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type 5 support.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• Connect this optional service card to the trunk through terminal board from the E & M

(TIE) line; do not connect to the trunk directly.

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

To terminal board from the E & M (TIE) line

LED

Amphenol

Installation Manual 79

Page 80: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 TA Tip port 1 26 RA Ring port 1

2 T1A Tip 1 port 1 27 R1A Ring 1 port 1

3 EA E line port 1 28 MA M line port 1

4 SGA SG line port 1 29 SGB SG line port 2

5 TB Tip port 2 30 RB Ring port 2

6 T1B Tip 1 port 2 31 R1B Ring 1 port 2

7 EB E line port 2 32 MB M line port 2

8 TC Tip port 3 33 RC Ring port 3

9 T1C Tip 1 port 3 34 R1C Ring 1 port 3

10 EC E line port 3 35 MC M line port 3

11 TD Tip port 4 36 RD Ring port 4

12 T1D Tip 1 port 4 37 R1D Ring 1 port 4

13 ED E line port 4 38 MD M line port 4

14 TE Tip port 5 39 RE Ring port 5

15 T1E Tip 1 port 5 40 R1E Ring 1 port 5

16 EE E line port 5 41 ME M line port 5

17 TF Tip port 6 42 RF Ring port 6

18 T1F Tip 1 port 6 43 R1F Ring 1 port 6

19 EF E line port 6 44 MF M line port 6

20 TG Tip port 7 45 RG Ring port 7

21 T1G Tip 1 port 7 46 R1G Ring 1 port 7

22 EG E line port 7 47 MG M line port 7

23 TH Tip port 8 48 RH Ring port 8

24 T1H Tip 1 port 8 49 R1H Ring 1 port 8

25 EH E line port 8 50 MH M line port 8

50 25

26 1

80 Installation Manual

Page 81: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

Installation Manual 81

Page 82: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.6 T1 Card

Function1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA standard compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not connect to the trunk directly.

• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in Canada, where the ferrite core is not necessarily required). Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

CAUTIONT1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Switch Settings

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

LEDs

RJ45

To NT1 / Extension

AB

82 Installation Manual

Page 83: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

3 Reserved – –

4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

3 Reserved – –

4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

6-8 Reserved – –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Out of synchronisation

RAI Red RAI signal status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)

AIS Red AIS status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

8

1

8

1

Installation Manual 83

Page 84: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the T1 cards is shown below:

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised

• ON: Synchronised

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

Indication Colour Description

Diameter Maximum Distance0.5 mm: Under 200 m

84 Installation Manual

Page 85: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.7 E1 Card

Function1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector

Notes• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the

Public Switched Telephone Network.

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not connect to the trunk directly.

• Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot be used simultaneously.

• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

CAUTIONE1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

LEDs

To NT1/Extension

To NT1/Extension

BNC (TX)BNC (RX)

BNC (TX) outer conductor

For Frame Ground Open

For Frame Ground Short

J308

1 2 31 2 3

J308

J309

12

3

J309

12

3

BNC (RX) outer conductor

RJ45

OR

OR

AB

For RJ45

For BNC120Ω

75Ω

120Ω

75ΩOR

Installation Manual 85

Page 86: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Switch Settings

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension use

BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Termination Slide Select 120 (default) or 75 for connector type to be used.

A/B Slide When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.When using BNC connectors, keep the A position.

Frame Ground Short

Short pin J308 is for BNC (TX) outer conductor, and J309 is for BNC (RX) outer conductor.

Connection of 1 and 2: Open (default)Connection of 2 and 3: Short

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

3 Reserved – –

4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

3 Reserved – –

4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

2 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8

1

8

1

1

2

86 Installation Manual

Page 87: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

LED Indications

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the E1 cards is shown below:

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

2 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Out of synchronisation

RAI Red RAI signal status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)

AIS Red AIS status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised

• ON: Synchronised

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

1

2

Diameter Maximum Distance0.5 mm: Under 200 m

Installation Manual 87

Page 88: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.8 BRI4 and BRI8 Cards

Function

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Ferrite core(s) × 1 (BRI4 card) or 2 (BRI8 card)

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes• LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.

• When connecting these optional service cards to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.

• These optional service cards have 100 of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection, the cards must be placed at the end of the bus.

• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• These optional service cards can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

NoticeIf the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied from the BRI4/BRI8 card by programming the Hybrid IP-PBX accordingly.

However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power supplied to the terminal from the BRI4/BRI8 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit of the BRI4/BRI8 card or the terminal.

BRI4: 4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

BRI8: 8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

LEDs

RJ45(LINE 1 to LINE 8)

AB

To NT1/ Extension

88 Installation Manual

Page 89: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Switch Settings

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

LED Indications

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –

3 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

4 RX2 (+) Receive data 2

5 RX1 (-) Receive data 1

6 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

7-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –

3 RX2 (+) Receive data 2

4 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

5 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

6 RX1 (-) Receive data 1

7-8 Reserved – –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

8

1

8

1

Installation Manual 89

Page 90: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

LINE LED Pattern

L1: ON (Synchronous)

L2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)

Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

LINE 8LINE 7LINE 6LINE 5LINE 4LINE 3LINE 2LINE 1

Green Line status indication (LINE 1 to LINE 8):

Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

NoteLINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.

L1 L2 Master Clock

LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF

ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF

ON OFF ON

ON ON ON

Indication Colour Description

1 s

1 s

1 s

1 s

1 s

90 Installation Manual

Page 91: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the Hybrid IP-PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:

CAT 5: Under 1000 m

TE

Point-to-Point

ExpansionPoint-to-Multipoint

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

TE 8TE 1

CAT 5: Under 150 m

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m

Installation Manual 91

Page 92: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.9 PRI30 Card

Function1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector

Notes• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the

Public Switched Telephone Network.

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.

• Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot be used simultaneously.

• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

CAUTIONPRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

LEDs

RJ45

To NT1/Extension

To NT1 / Extension

BNC (TX)BNC (RX)

AB

For RJ45

For BNC

120Ω

75Ω

120Ω

75ΩOR

92 Installation Manual

Page 93: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Switch Settings

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Termination Slide Select 120 (default) or 75 for connector type to be used.

A/B Slide When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.When using BNC connectors, keep the A position.

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

3 Reserved – –

4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

3 Reserved – –

4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

2 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8

1

8

1

1

2

Installation Manual 93

Page 94: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

2 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Out of synchronisation

RAI Red RAI signal status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)

AIS Red AIS status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised

• ON: Synchronised

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

D-LINK Green Data link status indication

• OFF: Not established

• ON: Established

1

2

94 Installation Manual

Page 95: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the PRI30 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance0.5 mm: Under 200 m

Installation Manual 95

Page 96: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.10 PRI23 Card

Function1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN protocol) compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.

• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in Canada, where the ferrite core is not necessarily required). Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

CAUTIONPRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Switch Settings

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

LEDs

RJ45

To NT1/ Extension

AB

96 Installation Manual

Page 97: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

3 Reserved – –

4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

6-8 Reserved – –

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

3 Reserved – –

4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

6-8 Reserved – –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Out of synchronisation

RAI Red RAI signal status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)

AIS Red AIS status indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

8

1

8

1

Installation Manual 97

Page 98: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the PRI23 cards is shown below:

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised

• ON: Synchronised

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

D-LINK Green Data link status indication

• OFF: Not established

• ON: Established

Indication Colour Description

Diameter Maximum Distance0.5 mm: Under 200 m

98 Installation Manual

Page 99: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.11 IP-GW4 Card

Function4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, and G.723.1 compliant. G3 fax support.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): CD-ROM (including PC programming software anddocumentation) × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes• Maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.

• The IP-GW4 card occupies the space of 2 free slots when it is installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4 card, refer to the documentation for the IP-GW4 card. To programme the IP-GW4 card, use the PC programming software designed for the IP-GW4 card.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

RJ45 (10BASE-T)

LEDs

To private IP network

Installation Manual 99

Page 100: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T)

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

2 TPO- O Transmit data-

3 TPI+ I Receive data+

4-5 Reserved – –

6 TPI- I Receive data-

7-8 Reserved – –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

ONLINE Green On-line status indication

• ON: On-line mode

• Flashing: Emergency maintenance mode

ALARM Red Alarm indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

IAM BUSY Green Busy status indication

• OFF: Not used

• ON: At least one line is used

LINK Green Link status indication

• OFF: Connection error

• ON: Normal connection

DATA Green Data transmission indication

• OFF: No data transmitted

• ON: Data transmitting

COL Green Data collision indication

• OFF: No data collision

• ON: Data collision

8

1

100 Installation Manual

Page 101: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

SIOSEL Green Serial maintenance port status indication

• OFF: CPU power port used (maintenance port not available)

• ON: Maintenance port available

Indication Colour Description

Installation Manual 101

Page 102: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.4.12 IP-GW4E Card

Function4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1, and G.711 compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): CD-ROM (including documentation for web programming) × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes• Maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.

• The IP-GW4E card occupies the space of only 1 free slot when it is installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4E card, refer to the documentation for the IP-GW4E card. To programme the IP-GW4E card, use the web programming designed for the IP-GW4E card.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

2 TPO- O Transmit data-

3 TPI+ I Receive data+

4-5 Reserved – –

6 TPI- I Receive data-

7-8 Reserved – –

LEDs

RJ45(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

To private IP network

8

1

102 Installation Manual

Page 103: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.4 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

ONLINE Green On-line status indication

• ON: On-line mode

• OFF: Off-line mode

• Flashing: Maintenance mode

Note

If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be OFF.

ALARM Red Alarm indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm

VoIP BUSY Green VoIP (H.323) process indication

• OFF: VoIP process inactive

• ON: VoIP process active

LINK Green Link status indication

• OFF: Connection error

• ON: Normal connection

DATA Green Data transmission indication

• OFF: No data transmitted

• ON: Data transmitting

Installation Manual 103

Page 104: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card

FunctionCSIF4: 4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs.

CSIF8: 8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for CSIF8 card only.

• When using the CSIF4 card, please note that the Hybrid IP-PBX software will recognise the CSIF4 card as the CSIF8 card. As a result, 8 cell stations may appear to be available; however, only 4 cell stations are supported by the CSIF4 card.

• For details about connecting the CS, refer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX" in "2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200" or "2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX" in "2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200".

RJ45(LINE 1 to LINE 8)

LED

To CS

104 Installation Manual

Page 105: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function

1-2 Reserved –

3 D1 Data port (High)

4 POWH Power (High)

5 POWL Power (Low)

6 D2 Data port (Low)

7-8 Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

8

1

Installation Manual 105

Page 106: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.2 DHLC8 Card

Function8-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs, with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

106 Installation Manual

Page 107: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 RA SLT Ring port 1 26 TA SLT Tip port 1

2 D2A PT Data port 1 (Low) 27 D1A PT Data port 1 (High)

3 Reserved – 28 Reserved –

4 RB SLT Ring port 2 29 TB SLT Tip port 2

5 D2B PT Data port 2 (Low) 30 D1B PT Data port 2 (High)

6 Reserved – 31 Reserved –

7 RC SLT Ring port 3 32 TC SLT Tip port 3

8 D2C PT Data port 3 (Low) 33 D1C PT Data port 3 (High)

9 Reserved – 34 Reserved –

10 RD SLT Ring port 4 35 TD SLT Tip port 4

11 D2D PT Data port 4 (Low) 36 D1D PT Data port 4 (High)

12 Reserved – 37 Reserved –

13 RE SLT Ring port 5 38 TE SLT Tip port 5

14 D2E PT Data port 5 (Low) 39 D1E PT Data port 5 (High)

15 Reserved – 40 Reserved –

16 RF SLT Ring port 6 41 TF SLT Tip port 6

17 D2F PT Data port 6 (Low) 42 D1F PT Data port 6 (High)

18 Reserved – 43 Reserved –

19 RG SLT Ring port 7 44 TG SLT Tip port 7

20 D2G PT Data port 7 (Low) 45 D1G PT Data port 7 (High)

21 Reserved – 46 Reserved –

22 RH SLT Ring port 8 47 TH SLT Tip port 8

23 D2H PT Data port 8 (Low) 48 D1H PT Data port 8 (High)

24-25

Reserved – 49-50

Reserved –

50 25

26 1

Installation Manual 107

Page 108: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Orange/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when starting up the PT-interface CS)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

108 Installation Manual

Page 109: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.3 DLC8 Card

Function8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Installation Manual 109

Page 110: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 Reserved – 26 Reserved –

2 D2A Data port 1 (Low) 27 D1A Data port 1 (High)

3-4 Reserved – 28-29

Reserved –

5 D2B Data port 2 (Low) 30 D1B Data port 2 (High)

6-7 Reserved – 31-32

Reserved –

8 D2C Data port 3 (Low) 33 D1C Data port 3 (High)

9-10

Reserved – 34-35

Reserved –

11 D2D Data port 4 (Low) 36 D1D Data port 4 (High)

12-13

Reserved – 37-38

Reserved –

14 D2E Data port 5 (Low) 39 D1E Data port 5 (High)

15-16

Reserved – 40-41

Reserved –

17 D2F Data port 6 (Low) 42 D1F Data port 6 (High)

18-19

Reserved – 43-44

Reserved –

20 D2G Data port 7 (Low) 45 D1G Data port 7 (High)

21-22

Reserved – 46-47

Reserved –

23 D2H Data port 8 (Low) 48 D1H Data port 8 (High)

24-25

Reserved – 49-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Orange/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when starting up the PT-interface CS)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

110 Installation Manual

Page 111: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.4 DLC16 Card

Function16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Installation Manual 111

Page 112: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 D2A Data port 1 (Low) 26 D1A Data port 1 (High)

2 D2B Data port 2 (Low) 27 D1B Data port 2 (High)

3 D2C Data port 3 (Low) 28 D1C Data port 3 (High)

4 D2D Data port 4 (Low) 29 D1D Data port 4 (High)

5 D2E Data port 5 (Low) 30 D1E Data port 5 (High)

6 D2F Data port 6 (Low) 31 D1F Data port 6 (High)

7 D2G Data port 7 (Low) 32 D1G Data port 7 (High)

8 D2H Data port 8 (Low) 33 D1H Data port 8 (High)

9 D2I Data port 9 (Low) 34 D1I Data port 9 (High)

10 D2J Data port 10 (Low) 35 D1J Data port 10 (High)

11 D2K Data port 11 (Low) 36 D1K Data port 11 (High)

12 D2L Data port 12 (Low) 37 D1L Data port 12 (High)

13 D2M Data port 13 (Low) 38 D1M Data port 13 (High)

14 D2N Data port 14 (Low) 39 D1N Data port 14 (High)

15 D2O Data port 15 (Low) 40 D1O Data port 15 (High)

16 D2P Data port 16 (Low) 41 D1P Data port 16 (High)

17-25

Reserved – 42-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Orange/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when starting up the PT-interface CS)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

112 Installation Manual

Page 113: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.5 SLC8 Card

Function8-port extension card for SLTs with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes

• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Installation Manual 113

Page 114: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1

2-3 Reserved – 27-28

Reserved –

4 RB Ring port 2 29 TB Tip port 2

5-6 Reserved – 30-31

Reserved –

7 RC Ring port 3 32 TC Tip port 3

8-9 Reserved – 33-34

Reserved –

10 RD Ring port 4 35 TD Tip port 4

11-12

Reserved – 36-37

Reserved –

13 RE Ring port 5 38 TE Tip port 5

14-15

Reserved – 39-40

Reserved –

16 RF Ring port 6 41 TF Tip port 6

17-18

Reserved – 43-44

Reserved –

19 RG Ring port 7 44 TG Tip port 7

20-21

Reserved – 45-46

Reserved –

22 RH Ring port 8 47 TH Tip port 8

23-25

Reserved – 48-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

114 Installation Manual

Page 115: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.5.6 SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards

Function

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Notes

• Panasonic SLT with Message Waiting Lamp (e.g., KX-T7310) is recommended for connection to the MSLC16 card.

• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "2.2.10 Fastening Amphenol Type Connector".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

SLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.MSLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with Message Waiting Lamp control and 4 power

failure transfer (PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 160 V/90 V for Message Waiting Lamp control.

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Installation Manual 115

Page 116: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.5 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

Amphenol Connector

LED Indications

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1

2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2

3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3

4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4

5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5

6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6

7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7

8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8

9 RI Ring port 9 34 TI Tip port 9

10 RJ Ring port 10 35 TJ Tip port 10

11 RK Ring port 11 36 TK Tip port 11

12 RL Ring port 12 37 TL Tip port 12

13 RM Ring port 13 38 TM Tip port 13

14 RN Ring port 14 39 TN Tip port 14

15 RO Ring port 15 40 TO Tip port 15

16 RP Ring port 16 41 TP Tip port 16

17-25

Reserved – 42-50

Reserved –

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

50 25

26 1

116 Installation Manual

Page 117: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.1 OPB3 Card

FunctionOptional 3-slot base card for mounting a maximum of 3 option cards from the following:

• DPH4 card

• DPH2 card

• ECHO16 card

• MSG4 card

CAUTIONA LITHIUM BATTERY IS USED IN OPB3 CARD. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH THE INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)

• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

LED

Installation Manual 117

Page 118: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.2 DPH4 Card

Function4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 3, 10-pin terminal block × 1, 8-pin terminal block × 1

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Notes• Maximum of 3 DPH4 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

• For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".

Screw

DPH4 CardOPB3 Card

Fully insert the connectors throughthe panel openings.

To door openers

To doorphones

10-pin

8-pin

118 Installation Manual

Page 119: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

8-pin Terminal Block

10-pin Terminal Block

No. Signal Name Function

1 DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

2 com4 Doorphone 4 receive

3 DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit

4 com3 Doorphone 3 receive

5 DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit

6 com2 Doorphone 2 receive

7 DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

8 com1 Doorphone 1 receive

No. Signal Name Function

1-2 Reserved –

3 OP4b Door opener 4

4 OP4a Door opener 4 com

5 OP3b Door opener 3

6 OP3a Door opener 3 com

7 OP2b Door opener 2

8 OP2a Door opener 2 com

9 OP1b Door opener 1

10 OP1a Door opener 1 com

8

1

10

1

Installation Manual 119

Page 120: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.3 DPH2 Card

Function2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 3, 10-pin terminal block × 1, 8-pin terminal block × 1

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Notes• Maximum of 3 DPH2 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

• For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".

Screw

DPH2 CardOPB3 Card

Fully insert the connectors throughthe panel openings.

To doorphones/door openers

10-pin

8-pin

120 Installation Manual

Page 121: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Pin Assignments

8-pin Terminal Block

10-pin Terminal Block

No. Signal Name Function

1 Path_2b Doorphone 2 transmit

2 Path_2a Doorphone 2 receive

3 Call_2b Doorphone 2 call button

4 Call_2a Doorphone 2 call button com

5 Path_1b Doorphone 1 transmit

6 Path_1a Doorphone 1 receive

7 Call_1b Doorphone 1 call button

8 Call_1a Doorphone 1 call button com

No. Signal Name Function

1-2 Reserved –

3 OP2b Door opener 2

4 OP2a Door opener 2 com

5 OP1b Door opener 1

6 OP1a Door opener 1 com

7 DC2b Doorphone control 2

8 DC2a Doorphone control 2 com

9 DC1b Doorphone control 1

10 DC1a Doorphone control 1 com

8

1

10

1

Installation Manual 121

Page 122: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Connection Chart for German Type Doorphones and Door Openers

German Type Doorphone 2

Doorphone 2Adaptor

220 V~

BL Door Opener 2

RT

L O U B

Path_2aPath_2bDC2bDC2aOP2b

10987654321

Path_1aPath_1bDC1bDC1aOP1bOP1a

87654321

L O U B~12 V~8 V TO~0 V

BL: LightRT: Call ButtonOP: Door Opener Connection TerminalDC: Doorphone Current Supply Control TerminalPath: Doorphone Call Path : Speaker : Microphone : Shield

Call_2b

Call_1a

Call_2a

Call_1b

Doorphone 1Adaptor

220 V~

BL Door Opener 1

RT

L O U B

L O U B~12 V~8 V TO~0 V

German Type Doorphone 1

122 Installation Manual

Page 123: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.4 ECHO16 Card

Function16-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 3

User-supplied (not included): none

Notes• To establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO16 card and

enable the echo cancellation for conference using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "3.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration").

• Only 1 ECHO16 card can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Screw

inside

ECHO16 Card

OPB3 Card

Installation Manual 123

Page 124: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.5 MSG4 Card

Function4-channel message card. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Screws × 3

User-supplied (not included): none

Note

Maximum of 3 MSG4 cards can be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Screw

MSG4 Card

OPB3 Card

inside

124 Installation Manual

Page 125: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card

FunctionEthernet card for CTI communication via 10BASE-T port. CSTA Phase 3 protocol compatible.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• Maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.

• This optional service card can be connected to PCs on a LAN via a Server PC to provide third party call control CTI.The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T)

No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

2 TPO- O Transmit data-

3 TPI+ I Receive data+

4-5 Reserved – –

6 TPI- I Receive data-

7-8 Reserved – –

LEDs

RJ45 (10BASE-T)

To LAN/Server PC

8

1

Installation Manual 125

Page 126: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.6 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS

Green/Red

Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off

• Green ON: Normal

• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)

• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

LINK STATUS Green Link status indication

• Flashing: In communication

• ON: In normal linking

126 Installation Manual

Page 127: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.7.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

" " indicates that the extension card supports the terminal.

PT-interface CS

DPT APT DSS Console SLT

DHLC8 Card

MSLC16, SLC16, SLC8 Cards

DLC16, DLC8 Cards

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 500 mø 0.5 mm: Under 720 mø 0.6 mm: Under 830 mCAT 5: Under 720 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 140 mø 0.5 mm: Under 229 mø 0.6 mm: Under 360 mCAT 5: Under 229 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 698 mø 0.5 mm: Under 1128 mø 0.6 mm: Under 1798 mCAT 5: Under 1128 m

Other PT andDSS Console

SLT

KX-T7600 Series

PT-interface CSCable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

Installation Manual 127

Page 128: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.7.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.

NoteIn addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT.

With APT

With DPTParallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.

If the XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DHLC8 card

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1",and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

SLTAPT

ModularT-Adaptor

To DHLC8 card

SLTDPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

128 Installation Manual

Page 129: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using an EXtra Device PortWith KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)

With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)

To DHLC8 card

DPT SLT

To DHLC8 cardTo SLT

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

To DHLC8 card

DPT SLT

To DHLC8 card To SLT

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

TO TEL

TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT

Installation Manual 129

Page 130: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.7.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connected to a DHLC8 card, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.

Notes• Both DPTs must be KX-T7600 series DPTs (excluding KX-T7640).

• Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.

• If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

130 Installation Manual

Page 131: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using an Extra Device Port

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R","D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 131

Page 132: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

With KX-T7600E Series DPT

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

132 Installation Manual

Page 133: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using an Extra Device PortConnecting to a Slave DPT

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 133

Page 134: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Connecting to a Master DPT

SLT

To slave DPT

To SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

Back View of DPTs

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card(for connection of SLT)

134 Installation Manual

Page 135: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.7 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.7.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

CTI connection between a PC and a KX-T7633/T7636 DPT provides first party call control. The CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 1.1), and uses the CSTA Phase 3 protocol.

A USB Module (KX-T7601) must be connected to the KX-T7633/T7636 DPT.

Note

The operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Notes• Maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

• USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection. In a Digital XDP connection, the PC cannot be used. If a USB module is connected to a slave DPT, the DPT will not work properly.

USB Cable

To PC

ULL

USB Port

USB Module

Installation Manual 135

Page 136: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.1 Overview

The following equipment is required to connect the wireless system:

CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0142CE/KX-TDA0141CE)KX-TDA0142CE Using a CSIF Card

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 4 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

• CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)One CSIF4 card supports up to 4 Cell Stations. Up to 2 CSIF4 cards can be connected to the KX-TDA100, and up to 4 can be connected to the KX-TDA200.

• CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)One CSIF8 card supports up to 8 Cell Stations. Up to 2 CSIF8 cards can be connected to the KX-TDA100, and up to 4 can be connected to the KX-TDA200.

KX-TDA0141CE Using a DHLC/DLC Card

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

Note for users in Europe

This Cell Station Unit for DECT is for connection to a Panasonic PBX of a European country.

PS: DECT Portable Station (KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590/KX-TD7580)The KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200 can support up to 128 PSs. For more details about the PS, please refer to the PS Operating Instructions.

RF Specification

Item Description

Radio Access Method Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD

Frequency Band 1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1

Number of Carriers 10*2

Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz

Bit Rate 1152 kbps

Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame

Frame Length 10 ms

Modulation Scheme GFSK

Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter

Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding

Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)

136 Installation Manual

Page 137: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C),

low temperature (less than 0 °C), vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).

• The CS should not be placed near high voltage equipment.

• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

• Do not use this wireless system near another high power cordless system such as DECT or SS wireless.

• Keep the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or the disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Transmission Output Average 10 mW

Peak 250 mW

*1 The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz.*2 The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 8.

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax machine, etc., or microwaves

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

Hybrid IP-PBX and CS More than 2 m

Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal channels each CS can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

Item Description

Installation Manual 137

Page 138: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Site surveys can be conducted using the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS. Inadvertent site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "2.8.3 Site Planning".

a. Obtain the map of the CS installation site.

b. Consider the service area demanded by the user on the map.

c. Plan the locations of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials and etc.

2. Prepare for site surveyRefer to "2.8.4 Before Site Survey".

a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.

b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.

c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Notes• Install at least 2 m above the floor.

• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590".

a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength weakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least 5 m.

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

138 Installation Manual

Page 139: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area demanded by the user.

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "2.8.6 After Site Survey".

a. Return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position, and stop supplying power.

b. Turn off the PS.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX and test the operationRefer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

a. Connect the CSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Register the PSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "2.8.8 Wall Mounting".

a. Assuming everything goes as planned, mount the CS on the wall.

Installation Manual 139

Page 140: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the building.

Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.

The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.

1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal.

2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.

3. Radio waves penetrate objects like those made of glass.

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than

the number of obstacles.

• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.

• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.

• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.

• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from various materials.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

140 Installation Manual

Page 141: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered with heat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate windows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetrate them.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

Installation Manual 141

Page 142: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed where there is no obstacle.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590").

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain the map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).

b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).

c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.

d. Write down the above information to the map.

2. Examine the service area demanded by the user on the map, referring to the following example.

a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area to 30 m to 60 m in one direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage AreaRadio signal strength level is greater than "3".(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage AreaRadio signal strengthlevel is greater than "8".(About 30 m to 40 m)Good conversationwill be kept.

Out of Service:Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnectsMay receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

142 Installation Manual

Page 143: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage areas of adjacent CSs.Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by WallsThings to take note of:

• The room is separated by walls.

• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.

CS installation plan:

• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as much it does where there is no obstacle, because the radio signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

Installation Manual 143

Page 144: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.4 Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.

NoteThe display language for the site survey is only in English.

Checking the CS ID NumberCheck the CS ID number label attached to the CS. If the CS ID number label is not attached to the CS, check the CS ID number using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance").

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PSUsing the KX-TCA255

Note

To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

A: + C: + E: +

B: + D: + F: +

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

3DEF

4GHI0

1 5JKL

2ABC

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

144 Installation Manual

Page 145: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using the KX-TD7590

Note

To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

F1

F2

F3

INT'

OKA: C: E:

B: D: F:

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

Installation Manual 145

Page 146: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.

2. Set the channel number switches as desired.

Notes

• To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a channel number must be set for each CS.

• If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.

Channel Number Switch

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal Test Switch

Channel 0

1

2

3

4

146 Installation Manual

Page 147: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3. After setting the DIP switch, connect an AC adaptor or battery box to the CS using a power supply adaptor.

Note for users in the United Kingdom240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a battery box to the CS.

4. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping the antennas in the upright position.

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)Modular

Telephone Cord

Installation Manual 147

Page 148: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. In the Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength of the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as planned during site planning, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal StrengthAfter locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. The PS scans whether there is a CS that can link with on channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test mode. The channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 9.

1. Enter the Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Notes*1: Channel number

*2: Slot number

*3: When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.

*4: Radio signal strength level

*5: Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number of errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greater radio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frame error is "0000".

0 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:9005301234

0

Display example:

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:90053012340 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

148 Installation Manual

Page 149: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

CAUTIONStoring the scan data will clear all directory data.

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving to and away from the CS.

a. Move to the CS until the point the radio signal strength level becomes "12".

b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.

c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

Channel no. 0

PS

PS

PS CH0L:03

CH0L:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnects May receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

CH0L:08

Installation Manual 149

Page 150: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.

a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area demanded by the user.

Notes• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are

saved each time. If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels × 24 slots in total can be made.

• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error counters), change the location of the CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

5 m to 10 mChannel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

150 Installation Manual

Page 151: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Clearing the Stored Scan DataWhen "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the scan data.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 9 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/A a

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 9 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 9 4GHI

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 9 4GHI

Installation Manual 151

Page 152: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit the Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

1. Keep pressing POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.

2. Disconnect the AC adaptor or battery box from the CS and stop supplying electricity.

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

152 Installation Manual

Page 153: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

Using a CSIF CardRefer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2, Ferrite core × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about CSIF card, refer to "2.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card".

Signal Name

Signal Name Pin No.1234

D1POWHPOWL

D2

D1POWHPOWL

D2

Pin No.12345678

CSIF card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 444 mø 0.5 mm: Under 694 mø 0.6 mm: Under 1000 mCAT 5: Under 694 m

Port 1

CSIF8 Card

Installation Manual 153

Page 154: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using a DHLC/DLC CardRefer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "2.5.2 DHLC8 Card", "2.5.3 DLC8 Card", or "2.5.4 DLC16 Card" .

Signal NameD1D2

DHLC/DLC card(Amphenol)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

Signal Name Pin No.1234

D1

D2

CS (RJ11)

DHLC8 Card

154 Installation Manual

Page 155: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

Modular

To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Installation Manual 155

Page 156: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

For the KX-TDA0142CE User only:

3. Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core. Then close the case of the ferrite core.

Note

If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the ferrite core.

To CSIF card

156 Installation Manual

Page 157: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and Hybrid IP-PBX is required. A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the Hybrid IP-PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" and "3.3 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide.

Entering the Hybrid IP-PBX System Programming Mode Using a PTAdministrator Level

Note

means default value.

PS RegistrationOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different Hybrid IP-PBXs.

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

[690]001 to 128

PS No.1 to 4 digits END

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

"Please wait".

"Enter Base PIN".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

Installation Manual 157

Page 158: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using the KX-TD7590System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system lock password will be required for system setting.

Using the KX-TD7580

Select "DECT-SYS1-4"

4 digits

Choose "ENABLE/DISABLE".

PIN for PS Registration

System Lock Password

System Lock Password

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

4 digits

4 digits

ENABLE

F

/

/

SELECT

SELECT

SELECT/OK

/OK

/OK

C.Tone

To set system lock

F

DISABLE

OR

To register for the first time

To re-register

/Select "INITIAL SETTING".

SELECT

/Select "PS-PROGRAM".

SELECT/

Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password

Select "REGISTRATION".

/

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /C.Tone

4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

158 Installation Manual

Page 159: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong Hybrid IP-PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Before registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX, register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX with the matching PIN.

Notes• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PS.

Therefore, the PS can be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX without setting the PIN.

• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Therefore, even when there is more than 1 Hybrid IP-PBX with the same PIN near the PS, the PS will not be linked to a different Hybrid IP-PBX during normal operation after registration.

Setting the PIN for Hybrid IP-PBX

Changing the Display Language of the PSUsing the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Using the KX-TD7580

[692]1 to 4 digits

PIN for PS RegistrationEND

ENTER ENTER1234

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/Select "DISPLAY SETTING".

Select the desiredlanguage.

Select "LANGUAGE".

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

F

/

/SELECT

SELECTSELECT

0SELECT

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /

Installation Manual 159

Page 160: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:

• PS is turned on.

• PS is within the range.

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Using the KX-TD7580

[691]001 to 128

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

END

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".

4 digits

Handset PIN

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone

Select "YES".

Select "Cancel Base".

Select thedesired item.

F

/

0 /Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password /Select "CANCELDECT-SYS".

SELECT

SELECT/

Select "YES". C.Tone

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

SELECT

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Cancel Base".

Select "Registration".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/

C.Tone

4 digits

Handset PINSelect thedesired item.

/

Select "YES".

/

160 Installation Manual

Page 161: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 161

Page 162: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

162 Installation Manual

Page 163: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

NoteWhen you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from the measurement indicated above.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

Installation Manual 163

Page 164: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.1 Overview

The following equipment is required to connect the wireless system:

CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0142/KX-TDA0141)KX-TDA0142 Using a CSIF Card

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 3 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

• CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)One CSIF4 card supports up to 4 Cell Stations. Up to 2 CSIF4 cards can be connected to the KX-TDA100, and up to 4 can be connected to the KX-TDA200.

• CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)One CSIF8 card supports up to 8 Cell Stations. Up to 2 CSIF8 cards can be connected to the KX-TDA100, and up to 4 can be connected to the KX-TDA200.

KX-TDA0141 Using a DHLC/DLC Card

This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

PS: 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TD7680/KX-TD7690)The KX-TDA100 and KX-TDA200 can support up to 128 PSs. For more details about the PS, refer to the PS Operating Instructions.

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C),

low temperature (less than 0 °C), vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).

• The CS should not be placed near high voltage equipment.

• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

• Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere with the KX-TDA wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor noise.

• Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent interference. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax machine, etc.

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

Hybrid IP-PBX and CS More than 2 m

164 Installation Manual

Page 165: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

CS and CS More than 15 m

Please take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning. Please consult a certified dealer for details.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

Equipment Distance

Installation Manual 165

Page 166: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Inadvertent site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "2.9.3 Site Planning".

a. Obtain the map of the CS installation site.

b. Consider the service area demanded by the user on the map.

c. Plan the locations of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials and etc.

2. Prepare the CS for site surveyRefer to "2.9.4 Before Site Survey".

a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.

b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Notes• Install at least 2 m above the floor.

• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "2.9.5 Site Survey".

a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength weakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least 5 m.

e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area demanded by the user.

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 9 0

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 99

166 Installation Manual

Page 167: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "2.9.6 After Site Survey".

a. Return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position, and stop supplying power.

b. Turn off the PS.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX and test the operationRefer to "2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

a. Connect the CSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Register the PSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "2.9.8 Wall Mounting".

a. Assuming everything goes as planned, mount the CS on the wall.

Installation Manual 167

Page 168: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the building.

Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.

The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.

1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal.

2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.

3. Radio waves penetrate objects like those made of glass.

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than

the number of obstacles.

• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.

• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.

• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.

• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from various materials.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

168 Installation Manual

Page 169: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered with heat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate windows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetrate them.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

Installation Manual 169

Page 170: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed where there is no obstacle.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.9.5 Site Survey").

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain the map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).

b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).

c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.

d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area demanded by the user on the map, referring to the following example.

a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area to 30 m to 60 m in one direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage AreaRadio signal strength level is greater than "3".(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage AreaRadio signal strengthlevel is greater than "8".(About 30 m to 40 m)Good conversationwill be kept.

Out of Service:Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnectsMay receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

170 Installation Manual

Page 171: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage areas of adjacent CSs.Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some handover delay. The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This also applies in the case of interference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by WallsThings to take note of:

• The room is separated by walls.

• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.

CS installation plan:

• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as much it does where there is no obstacle, because the radio signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

Installation Manual 171

Page 172: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.

2. Set the CS number switches as desired.

Notes

• To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a CS number must be set for each CS.

• If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS number.

CS Number Switch

CS no. 1 CS no. 2 CS no. 3 CS no. 4 CS no. 5 CS no. 6 CS no. 7 CS no. 8 CS no. 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal Test Switch

172 Installation Manual

Page 173: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3. After setting the DIP switch, connect an AC adaptor or battery box to the CS using a power supply adaptor.

4. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping the antennas in the upright position.

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)Modular

Telephone Cord

Installation Manual 173

Page 174: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.5 Site Survey

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal Strength

Note

The display language for the site survey is only in English.

1. Enter the Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Notes

*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.

*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number; stored memory space will be indicated by a "-".

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.To store the scan data

0

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.To store the scan data

0

174 Installation Manual

Page 175: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving to and away from the CS.

a. Move to the CS until the point the radio signal strength level becomes "12".

b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.

c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.

a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

CS no. 1

PS

PS

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

CS NO.1 LEVEL:8

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnects May receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

5 m to 10 mCS no. 1 CS no. 2

Installation Manual 175

Page 176: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area demanded by the user.

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

CS no. 1 CS no. 2

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 9 1

Display example:When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 9 1

Display example:When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

176 Installation Manual

Page 177: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Deleting the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 9

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 9

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

Installation Manual 177

Page 178: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit the Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

1. Keep pressing POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.

2. Disconnect the AC adaptor or battery box from the CS and stop supplying electricity.

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

178 Installation Manual

Page 179: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

Using a CSIF CardRefer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about CSIF card, refer to "2.5.1 CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card".

Signal Name

Signal Name Pin No.1234

D1POWHPOWL

D2

D1POWHPOWL

D2

Pin No.12345678

CSIF card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 444 mø 0.5 mm: Under 694 mø 0.6 mm: Under 1000 mCAT 5: Under 694 m

Port 1

CSIF8 Card

Installation Manual 179

Page 180: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using a DHLC/DLC CardRefer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "2.5.2 DHLC8 Card", "2.5.3 DLC8 Card", or "2.5.4 DLC16 Card".

Signal NameD1D2

DHLC/DLC card(Amphenol)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

Signal Name Pin No.1234

D1

D2

CS (RJ11)

DHLC8 Card

180 Installation Manual

Page 181: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

Modular

To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Installation Manual 181

Page 182: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and Hybrid IP-PBX is required. A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the Hybrid IP-PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" and "3.3 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide.

Entering the System Programming ModePT (Administrator Level)

PS (Using the KX-TD7680)

PS (Using the KX-TD7690)

Note

means default value throughout this section.

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SET".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock PasswordIf required

FUNC

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SETTING".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

S1 S1

MENU SEL

S1

SEL

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock PasswordIf required

ENTR

S1

182 Installation Manual

Page 183: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

PS Registration

When the PS has not been registered yet

When registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You do not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

When the PS has already been registered to another Hybrid IP-PBXOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different Hybrid IP-PBXs.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

[690]001 to 128

PS No.1 to 4 digits END

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedly to select the desired language.

[ F2 ] [ F3 ]

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedlyto select the desiredlanguage.

F2 F3

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

C.Tone

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

S1S1

SEL SEL

C.Tone

Installation Manual 183

Page 184: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Setting the System LockWhen a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system setting.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Choose "Enable/Disable".Select

"SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

System Lock Password System Lock Password

S1 Choose "Enable/Disable".

SEL

ENTR

S1

S1

S1

S1

CHNG

SEL

ENTR

Select "SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

System Lock Password System Lock Password

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

184 Installation Manual

Page 185: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong Hybrid IP-PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Before registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX, register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX with the matching PIN.

Notes• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PS.

Therefore, the PS can be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX without setting the PIN.

• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Therefore, even when there is more than 1 Hybrid IP-PBX with the same PIN near the PS, the PS will not be linked to a different Hybrid IP-PBX during normal operation after registration.

Setting the PIN for Hybrid IP-PBX

Setting the PIN for PSUsing the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

[692]1 to 4 digits

PIN for PS RegistrationEND

ENTER ENTER1234

Select "CHANGE PIN"

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

Select "CHANGE PIN" S1

ENTR

S1

SEL

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

Installation Manual 185

Page 186: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:

• PS is turned on.

• PS is within the range.

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

[691]001 to 128

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

END

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

Select "YES".

C.Tone

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

S1S1

SEL SEL

Select "YES".

C.ToneS1

SEL

186 Installation Manual

Page 187: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.9.8 Wall Mounting

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Installation Manual 187

Page 188: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

NoteWhen you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from the measurement indicated above.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

188 Installation Manual

Page 189: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

The KX-TDA100 supports a maximum of 8 doorphones (KX-T30865 with a DPH4 card, or German type with a DPH2 card) and a maximum of 8 door openers.The KX-TDA200 supports a maximum of 16 doorphones (KX-T30865 with a DPH4 card, or German type with a DPH2 card) and a maximum of 16 door openers.

Notes• KX-T30865 is a Panasonic doorphone.

• German type doorphones and door openers are user-supplied.

Maximum Cabling Distance

Current Limit for door opener: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865)1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 70 mø 0.5 mm: Under 113 mø 0.6 mm: Under 180 mCAT 5: Under 113 m

Doorphone

Door Opener

Panasonic

Screw

Installation Manual 189

Page 190: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.

NoteTwo kinds of screws are included with a KX-T30865. Please choose the appropriate kind for your wall type.

3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.

4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.

ConnectionUse 8-pin and 10-pin terminal blocks (included with the card) for connection.

1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert the wire into the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other doorphones and door openers.Refer to "2.6.2 DPH4 Card" and "2.6.3 DPH2 Card" for pin assignments.

: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall

: when you wish to install the doorphone directly onto the wall

Screw

To 8-pin terminal block

To 8-pin terminal block

Doorphone

Door Opener

190 Installation Manual

Page 191: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.10 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Attach the terminal blocks to the connectors of the DPH4/DPH2 card on the Hybrid IP-PBX.

To doorphones/door openers

Installation Manual 191

Page 192: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

BGM/MOHThe Hybrid IP-PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Up to 2 external music sources (e.g., user-supplied radios) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTION• Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug.

Otherwise, music may intermittent.

• External Music Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

Note

When the Hybrid IP-PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same earth, hum noise may be induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.

BGM/Music on Hold

Pager:Amplifier/Speaker

PC Printer

PCCable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 10 mø 0.5 mm: Under 10 mø 0.6 mm: Under 10 mCAT 5: Under 10 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 10 mø 0.5 mm: Under 10 mø 0.6 mm: Under 10 mCAT 5: Under 10 m

Maximum DistanceUnder 5 m

Maximum DistanceUnder 2 m

USB

RS-232C

Server PC

192 Installation Manual

Page 193: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

PagerUp to 2 paging devices (user-supplied) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTIONExternal Paging Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

PC/Printer (via RS-232C)The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the user-supplied devices such as PC or line printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming, SMDR, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

Note

Use an RS-232C cross cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and PC.

Pin Assignments

Connection ChartsFor connecting a printer/PC with a 9-pin RS-232C connector

No. Signal Name FunctionCircuit Type

EIA CCITT

2 RD (RXD) Receive Data BB 104

3

4

SD (TXD)

ER (DTR)

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

BA

CD

103

108.2

5

6

SG

DR (DSR)

Signal Ground

Data Set Ready

AB

CC

102

107

7

8

RS (RTS)

CS (CTS)

Request To Send

Clear To Send

CA

CB

105

106

9 5

6 1

Hybrid IP-PBX Printer/PC

Circuit Type(EIA)

SignalName Pin No. Pin No.

SignalName

Circuit Type(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

2 RD (RXD) BB

3 SD (TXD) BA

4 ER (DTR) CD

5 SG AB

6 DR (DSR) CC

7 RS (RTS) CA

8 CS (CTS) CB

Installation Manual 193

Page 194: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

For connecting a printer/PC with a 25-pin RS-232C connector

RS-232C Signals• Receive Data (RXD):…(input)

Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.

• Transmit Data (TXD):…(output)Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.

• Data Terminal Ready (DTR):…(output)This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.

• Signal Ground (SG)Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.

• Data Set Ready (DSR):…(input)An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit DR (DSR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC.

• Request To Send (RTS):…(output)This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.

• Clear To Send (CTS):…(input)An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.

• Frame Ground (FG)Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.

Hybrid IP-PBX Printer/PC

Circuit Type(EIA)

SignalName

Pin No.SignalName

Circuit Type(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

1 FG AA

3 RD (RXD) BB

2 SD (TXD) BA

20 ER (DTR) CD

7 SG AB

5 CS (CTS) CB

6 DR (DSR) CC

CF4 RS (RTS)

Pin No.

194 Installation Manual

Page 195: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.11 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

PC/Server PC (via USB version 1.1)The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a USB interface. This interface provides communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PC or a Server PC.

The PC is used for system programming, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

The Server PC is used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI. The CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol.

Note

The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name

1 VBUS

2 USB D-

3 USB D+

4 GND

2

1

3

4

Installation Manual 195

Page 196: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.12.1 Power Failure Connections

When the power supply to the Hybrid IP-PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Guide for further information.Power Failure Connection is required to implement this feature.

NoteWhile DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the Hybrid IP-PBX will remain fully operational and the connection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.

Using Analogue Trunk Card and Extension CardPower Failure Connection connects a specific SLT and a trunk in the event of power failure. The following analogue trunk and extension cards can be used for Power Failure Connections:

• Analogue trunk cards: LCOT16 (4 PFT ports), LCOT8 (2 PFT port), and LCOT4 (2 PFT port)

• Extension cards: MSLC16 (4 PFT ports), SLC16 (4 PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT port) and SLC8 (2 PFT port)

To 1 analogue trunk card, connect only 1 extension card.

Note

By programming the Hybrid IP-PBX, a trunk conversation established during power failure can be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed, the connection will be dropped when power returns.

Trunk Card(e.g., LCOT8)

Extension Card(e.g., SLC8)

R2R1T1T2

T2T1R1R2

RJ11

To trunk To SLT

196 Installation Manual

Page 197: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connectors

RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Analogue Trunk CardPFT Ports 1 and 2

PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for LCOT16 card only)

RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Extension CardPFT Ports 1 and 2

PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for MSLC16/SLC16 card only)

No. Signal Name Function

1 R2 Ring port 2

2 R1 Ring port 1

3 T1 Tip port 1

4 T2 Tip port 2

No. Signal Name Function

1 R4 Ring port 4

2 R3 Ring port 3

3 T3 Tip port 3

4 T4 Tip port 4

No. Signal Name Function

1 T2 Tip port 2

2 T1 Tip port 1

3 R1 Ring port 1

4 R2 Ring port 2

No. Signal Name Function

1 T4 Tip port 4

2 T3 Tip port 3

3 R3 Ring port 3

4 R4 Ring port 4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

Installation Manual 197

Page 198: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Using BRI CardLINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI4 and BRI8 cards can be used for Power Failure Connections.

NoteWhen the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will be dropped.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connectors

Switch Settings

RJ45 Connector LINE 1 Pin Assignments

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

PFT Setting DIP Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and LINE 2 as a PFT port.

LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)

LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –

3 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

4 RX2 (+) Receive data 2

5 RX1 (-) Receive data 1

6 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

7-8 Reserved – –

RJ45(LINE 2)

RJ45(LINE 1)

To NT1OFF

ON

OFF

ON

To ISDN extensionSet all DIP switches at "ON" positions.

8

1

198 Installation Manual

Page 199: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.12 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

RJ45 Connector LINE 2 Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –

3 RX2 (+) Receive data 2

4 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

5 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

6 RX1 (-) Receive data 1

7-8 Reserved – –

8

1

Installation Manual 199

Page 200: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX

CAUTION• SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the MPR card

before start up.

• Before touching the System Initialise Switch and the Reset Button, discharge static by touching ground or wearing an earthing strap.

• Once you have started the Hybrid IP-PBX and if you unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX, do not perform the following procedures to start the Hybrid IP-PBX again. Otherwise, your programmed data is cleared. To restart the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button".

• The Hybrid IP-PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned "OFF".

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device, ensure that the socket-outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.

1. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

System Initialise Switch

Reset Button

SYSTEMINITIALIZE

RESET

NORMAL

RUN Indicator

200 Installation Manual

Page 201: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

2. Plug the AC power cord into the Hybrid IP-PBX and an AC outlet, and turn on the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Note

For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.

3. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool. (The RUN indicator will flash.)

4. While the RUN indicator is flashing (within about 10 s), return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position. Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min to 3 min. If successfully executed, the RUN indicator will stop flashing and be kept lit.

All data will be cleared, and the Hybrid IP-PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for the IP-GW card) will be initialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as 01:00.The data of the IP-GW card will not be initialised.

Notes

• Use only the AC power cord included with the Hybrid IP-PBX for the PSU.

• Use only the supplied AC power cord for the purpose of applying the EMC standard, if the Hybrid IP-PBX is connected (Germany only).

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

RUN Green PBX status indication

• OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)

• ON: Power On and running (on-line)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up

• Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:

• the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position

• the SD Memory Card not inserted

ALARM Red Alarm indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each card)

• Flashing: Alarm (MPR file error in restarting)

To AC Outlet

Installation Manual 201

Page 202: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

2.13 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Confirming the Trunk ConnectionAfter initialisation, programme the Hybrid IP-PBX and establish trunk connection, and then use a PT to confirm it.

To confirm, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) or press S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the trunk is available and connected.

202 Installation Manual

Page 203: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 3

Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console— KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 203

Page 204: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.1 Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.1 Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.1.1 Overview

KX-TDA Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Hybrid IP-PBX. To programme and administer the Hybrid IP-PBX by PC, you need to install the KX-TDA Maintenance Console onto the PC.This manual describes overview and installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console only.

KX-TDA Maintenance Console*1

*1 The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

Menu Bar

Programme Menu

204 Installation Manual

Page 205: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.2.1 Connection

Serial Interface Connection

Note

For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals".

LAN Connection via CTI-LINK Card

NoteFor pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card".

PC

USB Port

To USB Port

To COM Port

RS-232C Port

PC

PC

Switching Hub

To network port

RJ45

Installation Manual 205

Page 206: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

External Modem Connection

After connecting the Hybrid IP-PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the external modem to "ON", then the external modem will be initialised with the default values.

The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:

• The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.

• The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.

• The data compression should be disabled.

• Error Correction is not necessary.

Notes• Use an RS-232C straight cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and

external modem.

• An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be programmed by KX-TDA Maintenance Console. "AT&F0E0V1X1S10=30S12=50" is stored as the default value.

• For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modem's instructions.

To RS-232C port (25-pin)

RS-232C Port(9-pin)

To trunk/Hybrid IP-PBX extensionport assigned as the trunk destination

Modem

External Modem Hybrid IP-PBX

Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name

SD (TXD) 2

RD (RXD) 3

DR (DSR) 6

ER (DTR) 20

2 RD (RXD)

3 SD (TXD)

4 ER (DTR)

6 DR (DSR)

Pin No.

206 Installation Manual

Page 207: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console

System RequirementsOperating System

• Microsoft® Windows® 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Hardware

• CPU: Intel® Pentium® 133 MHz or better microprocessor

• RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)

• HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space

Password SecurityA password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password

1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers.

2. Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

3. Please change the password periodically.

4. We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers.

5. If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised access.

• If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool. For how to back up system data, refer to "3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".

• If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.

Installation Manual 207

Page 208: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Installing the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropriate Country/Area Data

Notes

• To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".

• To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.

Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)

When you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will setup the following basic items:

• Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set on the PC will be used.

• System Password for installer for PC programming.

• Operator extension numbers. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/night) can be assigned.

• Flexible Numbering type to pattern 1 or pattern 2. If pattern 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.

• Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers (0 or 9). The feature numbers for operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS can be selected.

• Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX (including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.

1. a. Save the setup file of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console on your PC.

b. Double-click the icon to execute the setup file.

c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

2. a. Type the appropriate Country Code.The KX-TDA Maintenance Console will be installed with the appropriate default data for your country/area.

b. Click [Next].

c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

d. Click [Finish].

e. Click [OK].

208 Installation Manual

Page 209: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a USB cable.

2. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console from the start menu.

3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: 1234), then click [OK].

The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code.

NoteThere are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default: 1111), and User Level (default: none).

4. Click "Connect" "USB" from the menu bar.

5. Type the system password for installer (default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.

6. When country/area data do not match:

a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete.

b. Follow the procedure described in "2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX" and restart the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 209

Page 210: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Notice

1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost.To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the KX-TDA Maintenance Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.

2. When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup memory in the PBX.

3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the KX-TDA Maintenance Console is connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX. To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTIONDo not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.

7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and assign the basic items (Quick Setup).

The programme menu appears.

210 Installation Manual

Page 211: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3.2 Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console

Menu Bar

File

Connect

Tool

Utility Diagnosis File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)

Reset by the Command

Window

Help

File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PCSD Card File View and LoadSD Card File DeleteMessage File Transfer PC to PBXMessage File Transfer PBX to PCError LogT1/E1 Signaling Bit MonitorT1/E1 Line TraceISDN/Qsig Protocol TraceDigital Trunk Error ReportCS InformationPS InformationTimed UpdateSystem Reset

Installation Manual 211

Page 212: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration

This section briefly describes how to check the configuration of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.For detailed descriptions of each feature and related PT programming, refer to the on-line help at each screen.

1. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "3.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console").

2. To check the slot condition of the Hybrid IP-PBX:

a. Double-click "Configuration".

b. Double-click "Slot".

3. To check the PS status:

a. Double-click "Configuration".

b. Double-click "Portable Station".

4. To check other configurations, double-click the other items in the same manner.

212 Installation Manual

Page 213: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance

This section briefly describes how to perform maintenance of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.For detailed descriptions of each feature and related PT programming, refer to the on-line help at each screen.

1. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "3.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console").

2. To diagnose a card:Click "Utility" "Diagnosis" from the menu bar.

3. a. Click "Status" of the desired card and change its status to "OUS".

b. Click "Card Type" of the desired card.The diagnosis screen appears.

To use other utility commands, click the desired item in the step 2 above.

Installation Manual 213

Page 214: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) The programme files in the PC are transferred to SD Memory Card of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Programme files in the SD Memory Card is overwritten in this process.

File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC The programme files in the SD Memory Card are transferred to the PC.

SD Card File View and Load The name, date, time, and size of programme files in the SD Memory Card are viewed, then these files are transferred to each optional service card in the Hybrid IP-PBX or to CS connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

SD Card File Delete The programme files in the SD Memory Card are deleted.

Message File Transfer PC to PBX The message files for Outgoing Messages in the PC are transferred to all MSG cards mounted on the OPB3 card of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Available only when at least 1 MSG card is installed.

Message File Transfer PBX to PC The message files for Outgoing Messages in the MSG cards mounted on the OPB3 card are transferred to the PC. Available only when at least 1 MSG card is installed.

Error Log The error log is displayed (for details, refer to "4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").

T1/E1 Signaling Bit Monitor Monitors the sent and received signalling bits on T1/E1 line.

T1/E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dialling numbers on specified channel of T1/E1 line.

ISDN/Qsig Protocol Trace Displays ISDN protocol trace data of the BRI/PRI card.

Digital Trunk Error Report Displays the errors on digital trunks that are collected in the past for selected time units (10 min, 30 min, 1 h, or 24 h).

CS Information Displays the internal information of the CS.

PS Information Displays the registration information of the PS.

Timed Update Updates the programmes in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) when newer programmes are found in the SD Memory Card by comparing them at a preset time. (During the update, the cards become out of service.)

214 Installation Manual

Page 215: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

System Reset Reset by the Command

Resets the connected Hybrid IP-PBX. (It is the same as pushing the Reset Button with the System Initialise Switch in the "NORMAL" position.) After using this command, you have to restart the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX again.

Installation Manual 215

Page 216: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

216 Installation Manual

Page 217: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 4

Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

This section provides information on the Hybrid IP-PBX and telephone troubleshooting.

Installation Manual 217

Page 218: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1.1 Installation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Extension does not operate. Bad extension card. Exchange the card for a known working one.

Bad connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and telephone.

Take the telephone and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone works, then the connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the telephone must be repaired.

A telephone with an A-A1 relay is connected.

Use a 2-wire cord.

Set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to the "OUT" or "OFF" position.

Bad telephone. Take the telephone and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the telephone.

Wrong type of PSU. Replace the PSU with the appropriate type.

Improper operation. Press the Reset Button (refer to "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button").

Noise on external paging. Induced noise on the wire between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the amplifier.

Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the Hybrid IP-PBX and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.

Distorted external music. Excessive input level from external music source.

Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice and Live Call Screening (LCS) do not function as set when using a Wireless Phone (KX-T7880/KX-T7885/KX-TD7894/KX-TD7895).

Voice-calling mode and Hands-free mode with LCS are not available with Wireless Phones.

Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.

Set the LCS mode to "Private".

The ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red.

A major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

See the error log using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console (refer to "4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").

218 Installation Manual

Page 219: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1.2 Connection

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PT:

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT:

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:

CAUSEThe T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTIONUse the correct cord (theinner 2 wires are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are for D1/D2).

D1TR

D2

D1 TR D2

Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBX

Extension

CAUSEThe T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTIONUse the correct cord (the inner 2 wires are for T/R).•D1

TR

D2

TR

Extension

CAUSEThe "T" is connected to the "R".

SOLUTIONReverse the connections ofthe T/R.

D1TR

D2

TR

Extension

Can you dialan extension?

(Continued on the next page.)

No

Yes

If a telephone equipped with an A-A1 relay is connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to "OFF".

Installation Manual 219

Page 220: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Connection between the trunk and the Hybrid IP-PBX:

CAUSETrunk is connected to the T2/T1.

Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

SOLUTIONReconnect the trunk tothe T1/R1 or T2/R2 of thetelephone jack using 2-conductor wiring.

T2 R1T1R2

Trunk Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBXTrunk

T2 R1T1R2

(Continued from theprevious page.)

Can you dialout on a trunk?

No

220 Installation Manual

Page 221: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1.3 Operation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• When using the speakerphone on an APT, nothing is audible.

• The HANDSET/HEADSET selector is set to the "HEADSET" position.

• When the headset is not used, set the HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the "HANDSET" position.

• When using the speakerphone/monitor mode with a DPT, nothing is audible.

• The "HEADSET" mode is selected by Personal Programming, "Handset/Headset Selection".

• When the headset is not used, select the "HANDSET" mode by Personal Programming.

• The PT does not ring. • The ringer volume is off. • Turn on the ringer volume.

• During a power failure, extensions connected to ports 1 to 4 of MSLC16/SLC16 and ports 1 to 2 of DHLC8/SLC8 cards do not operate.

• A DPT or APT is connected to the extension port.

• The dialling mode (tone or pulse) is incorrect.

• Disconnect the DPT or APT and connect an SLT.

• Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other position.

• Originating an outside call, call transfer, or conference cannot be performed.

• The corresponding CO button does not exist on the PT.

• Programme the CO button. Refer to "1.19.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

• Cannot register the PS. • Wrong Personal Identification Number (PIN) is registered to the PS.

• Register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS.

• CS is not connected properly.

• Make sure that the cable is connected properly with correct pin assignments. Also, make sure that the cable does not make short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

Installation Manual 221

Page 222: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

• PS becomes out of range.

• Cannot make calls using the PS.

• CSIF card is not working.

• Install the CSIF card properly.

• CS is not working. • Make sure that the cable is connected properly with correct pin assignments. Also, make sure that the cable does not make short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• Location of CS is not good.

• Locate the CS properly (refer to "2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590" or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).

• Access system of the PS is not properly set.

• Change the access system setting of the PS to the appropriate system or automatic.

• Noise is frequent while using the PS.

• Conversations disconnect while using the PS.

• Call handover is not working.

• PS is out of CS coverage area.

• Locate the CS properly (refer to "2.8.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590" or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).

• PS stays out of service when the CS status is changed from Out of Service to In Service.

• It may take about 20 s for CS to start up after the status has been changed to In Service.

• Wait until the CS starts up.

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

222 Installation Manual

Page 223: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1.4 Using the Reset Button

If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset Button, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.

Notes

1. When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button causes the following:

• Camp-on is cleared.

• Calls on hold are terminated.

• Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.

• Calls in progress are terminated.

• Call park is cleared.

Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.

2. When the System Initialise Switch is set to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position, you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation: (1) pressing the Reset Button and then, (2) setting the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

Operation1. If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly:

a. Make sure that the System Initialise Switch is set to the "NORMAL" position.

b. Press the Reset Button.

2. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not operate properly:

a. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

b. Press the Reset Button.

c. Return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

Note

As a result of Step 2, all the programmed data will be cleared.

System Initialise Switch

Reset Button

SYSTEMINITIALIZE

RESET

NORMAL

RUN Indicator

Installation Manual 223

Page 224: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

3. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not work:

a. Unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

c. Plug in the Hybrid IP-PBX after 5 min.

d. Press the Reset Button.

e. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

224 Installation Manual

Page 225: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

When a major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.

Error Log Display FormatBelow is the display format of the error log. To see the error log using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console, refer to "3.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".

Example: KX-TDA Maintenance Console

Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Description

Item Description

1 Date Date of the error detection

2 Time Time of the error detection

3 Level Major Alarm (MJ ALM):

Errors that affect the whole system operation, or result in system failure

Minor Alarm (MN ALM):

Errors that affect certain part of system operation

4 Error Code Three-digit error code

1 2 4 5 6

3

04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow 04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down 04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #301 10501 Digital trunk RAI reception

1 2 3 4 5 6

Installation Manual 225

Page 226: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

5 Sub Code Five-digit sub code (1XXYY)

1: Cabinet number

XX: Slot number

KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 05: Free slot; 06: Option slot)

KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 10: Free slot; 11: Option slot)

YY: Physical port number (01 to 16)

For OPB3 card, sub slot number + port number will be displayed.

Sub slot 1: 11 to 14

Sub slot 2: 21 to 24

Sub slot 3: 31 to 34

Note

When there is no parameter for slot and physical port number, XX and YY will be displayed as "00".Example: Sub code for MPR card = 10000

6 Error Message Error description (maximum 36 characters)

Item Description

226 Installation Manual

Page 227: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

List of Errors and SolutionsThe tables below list the errors and their solutions.

When an error whose error code is indicated with "*" occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.

When the error conditions indicated by the error codes "021", "091", "092", and "510" are recovered, the ALARM indicator will turn off automatically, indicating successful troubleshooting. When other errors are logged, the ALARM indicator will turn off only when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.

In other words, the ALARM indicator will turn off under the following conditions:

• When the errors "021", "091", "092", and "510" are logged: when the error conditions are recovered

• When other errors are logged: when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA Maintenance Console

LPR (Optional Service Card with Local Processor) Initial Self Diagnosis

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

211 Speech path loop-back check error

• Optional service card malfunction: DHLC, DLC, SLC, CSIF, LCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB3, E&M, IP-GW, DID

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card212 Echo canceller

access error• Optional service card

malfunction: CSIF, ECHO

214 DSP Boot check error

• Optional service card malfunction: T1, E1

215 Framer IC access error

• Optional service card malfunction: T1, E1, BRI, PRI

216 MSG card DSP error

• Optional service card malfunction: MSG, OPB3

217 MSG card data error

• Optional service card malfunction: MSG, OPB3

• Erroneous recording of messages

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Re-record the messages

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

Installation Manual 227

Page 228: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

System Start-up and On-line Operation

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

000* MPR WDT overflow

• MPR card malfunction

• Optional service card malfunction: CTI-LINK

• Erroneous processing of MPR card software

• Software error due to external factors

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

001 SDRAM bit error

002 System Restart • Reset Button is pressed

• Power failure

• MPR card malfunction

• Erroneous processing of MPR card software

• Software error due to external factors

• Ignore if not frequent

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

010* AC power down • Power supply system malfunction (e.g., power failure, power noise, trouble with UPS)

• Bad connection or breaking of AC cord

• Power supply circuit (PSU, back board) malfunction

• Check the power supply system

• See if the AC cord is connected properly

• Check the AC cord

• Replace the AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the PSU (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the back board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

011* DC power down • AC power down

• Power supply circuit (PSU, back board) malfunction

• Detection of over current (short circuit on optional service cards)

• Check the power supply system

• See if the AC cord is connected properly

• Check the AC cord

• Replace the AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the PSU (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the back board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Remove the optional service cards and restart the Hybrid IP-PBX

012* MPR RAM battery low

• Battery out

• MPR card malfunction

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

228 Installation Manual

Page 229: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

014* FAN Alarm • PSU-L malfunction • See if anything is jammed in the fan

• Replace the PSU (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

016 CS overload • Defective cable

• CS malfunction

• Optional service card malfunction: CSIF

• Check the cable diameter and length

• Replace the CS

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

017 BRI port overload • Defective cable

• Defective ISDN terminal equipment

• Optional service card malfunction: BRI

• Check the cable

• Replace the defective terminal equipment

• Check the number of connected terminal equipment

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

020* SD file access error

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• MPR card malfunction

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the SD Memory Card

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

021* SD Memory Card disconnected

• SD Memory Card not installed

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• MPR card malfunction

022 Not enough free space on SD card

• Not enough memory space available to save the system data, or to upload system files from the KX-TDA Maintenance Console

• Delete the files whose file names start with "$" from SD Memory Card

• Delete the "Pxxx" files (old programme files of optional service cards) from SD Memory Card. "xxx" indicates the card type (e.g., "PDHLC" for DHLC card)

NoteDo not delete the "PMPR" file; it is the programme file of the MPR card.

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 229

Page 230: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

023 System data file version error

• Old system files on SD Memory Card

• Defective system files on SD Memory Card

• Restore the backup files

• Re-install the software

024 System initialization file version error

025 Card initialization file version error

026 LCD file version error

027 System data file checksum error

028 System initialization file checksum error

029 Card initialization file checksum error

030 LCD file checksum error

031* System data file not found

• SD Memory Card not installed

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• MPR card malfunction

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the SD Memory Card

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

032* System initialization file not found

033* Card initialization file not found

034* LCD file not found

035 System data file access error

036* System initialization file access error

037* Card initialization file access error

038* LCD file access error

090 Over Card Limitation

• Too many optional service cards installed

• Reduce the number of optional service cards

091* PT connection over

• Too many PTs connected

• Reduce the number of PTs

092* CS connection over

• Too many CSs connected

• Reduce the number of CSs

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

230 Installation Manual

Page 231: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

200 LPR start up error (ROM NG)

• Optional service card malfunction: DHLC, DLC, CSIF, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB3, CTI-LINK, E&M, IP-GW, DID, SLC8

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

201* LPR start up error (RAM NG)

202* LPR start up error (No Program)

• Optional service card malfunction: DHLC, DLC, CSIF, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB3, CTI-LINK, E&M, IP-GW, DID, SLC8

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Update the software of the corresponding optional service card

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

203* LPR start up error (Version NG)

204* LPR start up error (Download NG)

205* LPR start up error (No response)

206 LPR start up error (Card type NG)

207 LPR start up error (Check SUM NG)

230* Card disconnected

• Optional service card not installed properly

• Optional service card malfunction

• Back board malfunction

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Replace the back board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

231 LPR alive check error

• Optional service card malfunction: DHLC, DLC, CSIF, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB3, CTI-LINK, E&M, IP-GW, DID, SLC8

• Back board malfunction

• MPR card malfunction

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Replace the back board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the MPR card (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

232 MPR-LPR communication error

233 LPR data check error

234 DPLL clock failure

235* CS clock failure • Optional service card malfunction: CSIF

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 231

Page 232: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

250* T1/E1 DSP failure • Optional service card malfunction: T1, E1

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

251 MSG DSP failure • Optional service card malfunction: MSG

300* Digital trunk out of synchronization

• Network (digital trunk) malfunction

• Optional service card malfunction: PRI, T1, E1

• Wrong A/B switch setting: PRI, T1, E1

• Wrong termination switch setting: PRI30, E1

• Check the signals from the network

• Check the cable

• See if the A/B switch is set to A on the corresponding optional service card

• See if the termination switch is set properly on the corresponding optional

service card: 120 when using RJ45

connector; 75 when using BNC connector

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

301* Digital trunk RAI reception

302* Digital trunk AIS reception

303* Multiframe out of synchronization

304* Frame error

305* Data Link failure • Data link between the CS and CSIF card or DHLC/DLC card failed

• Data link between the network and PRI/BRI card failed

• Data link between the network and IP-GW card failed

• Check the connection between the CS and CSIF card or DHLC/DLC card

• Check the connection between the network and PRI/BRI card

• Check the connection between the network and IP-GW card

306 E1 Channel Block failure

• Network (digital trunk) malfunction

• Optional service card malfunction: E1

• Wrong A/B switch setting: E1

• Wrong termination switch setting: E1

• Check the signals from the network

• Check the cable

• See if the A/B switch is set to A on the corresponding optional service card

• See if the termination switch is set properly on the corresponding optional

service card: 120 when using RJ45

connector; 75 when using BNC connector

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

307 LAN No Carrier • IP-GW card not connected to the LAN

• Check the connection between the LAN and IP-GW card

308 IP-GW LAN Loop back Error

• Detection of IP-GW LAN Loop back Test error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

232 Installation Manual

Page 233: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

309 IP-GW Core Data Link Error

• Detection of IP-GW Core data Link error

• Press the Reset Button

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

310* Port Link Failure • Voice Processing System malfunction

• Ports defective on optional service card: DHLC, DLC

• Check the Voice Processing System

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

320 IP-GW H.323 Dummy Call Test Error

• Detection of IP-GW H.323 Dummy Call Test errror

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

321 IP-GW Gatekeeper Error

• Detection of Gatekeeper access error

• Check the IP address setting of Gatekeeper

• Check whether the Gatekeeper is connected to the network and work properly

• Check the route to the Gatekeeper

322 IP-GW Gatekeeper Registration Error

• Gatekeeper Registration is failed

• Check the Gatekeeper setting

323 IP-GW SDRAM Failure

• Detection of IP-GW SDRAM error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

324 IP-GW DPRAM Failure

• Detection of IP-GW DPRAM error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

325 IP-GW LAN Chip Failure

• Detection of IP-GW LAN Chip failure

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

326 IP-GW Stop • IP-GW is stopped from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is stopped from a remote maintenance PC

370 IP-GW Rebooted by Maintenance Console

• IP-GW is rebooted from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is rebooted from a remote maintenance PC

371 IP-GW Rebooted • Optional service card malfunction: IP-GW

• Check whether the software version of the IP-GW card is correct

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

390 Digital signal synchronization established

• Synchronisation of digital line established or restored

• This information is logged when synchronisation of digital line is established, and does not indicate an error condition that needs to be solved

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 233

Page 234: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

4.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

391 Data Link established

• Connection with PC Phone/PC Console or Voice Processing System (DPT Integration) established or restored

• This information is logged when connection with PC Phone/PC Console or Voice Processing System (DPT Integration) is established, and does not indicate an error condition that needs to be solved.However, if this is logged frequently (with "305 Data Link failure"), check the connection as it may not be done properly.

392 Clock master card selected

• Clock master card has been changed to the one indicated by the sub code

• Check if the proper card is selected as the new clock master card

393 LAN Carrier detected

• IP-GW card connected to the LAN

• This information is logged when synchronisation of LAN is established

394 IP-GW Core Data Link established

• IP-GW Core Data Link established

• This information is logged when IP-GW Core Data Link is recovered

395 IP-GW Gatekeeper Error Cleared

• Connection to the Gatekeeper is recovered

• This information is logged when connection to the Gatekeeper is recovered

396 IP-GW Run • IP-GW is started from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is started from a remote maintenance PC

510* SMDR disconnect • RS-232C cable not connected

• Breaking of RS-232C cable

• Printer (terminal equipment) malfunction

• Check the RS-232C cable

• Check the terminal equipment

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

234 Installation Manual

Page 235: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 5

System Outline — KX-TDA30

This section provides general information on the Hybrid IP-PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.

Installation Manual 235

Page 236: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA30

5.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA30

5.1.1 System Highlights

Networking FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following networking features:

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line.

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.

Built-in Small Call Centre FeaturesAn incoming call distribution group can be used as a small call centre with the following features:

Queuing Feature

When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

Log-in/Log-outIncoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up).

VIP Call

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) FeaturesConnecting a personal computer (PC) to this Hybrid IP-PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC.

Voice Mail FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT (Digital) Integration.

236 Installation Manual

Page 237: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.1 System Highlights — KX-TDA30

Parallelled Telephone FeaturesBy connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards.

Parallel Mode

An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) ModeAn SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Digital XDP

A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Portable Station (PS) FeaturesPSs (e.g., KX-TD7690) can be connected to this Hybrid IP-PBX. It is possible to use the Hybrid IP-PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone.

PC Phone/PC Console FeaturesThis Hybrid IP-PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features.

Installation Manual 237

Page 238: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30

5.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30

5.2.1 Main Unit

The main unit is equipped with 4 Super Hybrid Ports. For system expansion, optional service cards can be installed, and an additional AC adaptor can also be connected.

Construction of Main Unit

Main BoardFront Cover Cable Cover

238 Installation Manual

Page 239: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30

5.2.2 System Connection Diagram

Doorphone & Door Opener

BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)

Pager/Speaker

Batteries

Voice Processing System

KX-T7636/KX-T7633

Remote PC

PC

Printer

Router

PrivateIP Network

Trunk (Telephone Company Lines)Analogue/BRI

Hybrid IP-PBX

SLT

CSPS

Wireless Phone

Fax Machine

PC

USB

KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT

APT DSS Console

DSS ConsoleDPT

ISDN Telephone

Amplifier

Server PC

PC PCSLT

DPT

Installation Manual 239

Page 240: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.2 Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30

*1 In addition to the supplied AC adaptor, an additional AC adaptor can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

*2 The Hybrid IP-PBX has 4 Super Hybrid Ports pre-installed.

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

PCKX-T7636/KX-T7633 DSSConsole

Doorphone & Door Opener

AC Cord & AC Adaptor*1

PrivateIP Network

Station MessageDetail Recording (SMDR)

PC

Router

ISDN BRI LineISDN BRI Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)ISDN BRI Line(Digital Trunk)

DLC8(KX-TDA3172)

DLC4(KX-TDA3171)

SLC8(KX-TDA3174)

SLC4(KX-TDA3173)

DPH4(KX-TDA3161)

DPH2(KX-TDA3162)

ECHO8(KX-TDA3166)

EXT-CID(KX-TDA3168)

MEC(KX-TDA3105)

MSG2(KX-TDA3191)

IP-GW4(KX-TDA3480)

DID4(KX-TDA3182)

LCOT2(KX-TDA3183)

BRI2(KX-TDA3280)

BRI1(KX-TDA3283)

TelephoneCompany

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

Hybrid IP-PBX

DPT

APT DPT DSS Console

Voice Processing System

Voice Processing System

Radio

Amplifier Pager/Speaker

Server PC

CID4(KX-TDA3193)

PT-interface CS PS

4 Super Hybrid Ports*2

PT-interface CS PS

Batteries

Main Board

RMT(KX-TDA3196)

KX-T7600 DPT KX-T7600 DPT

AnalogueTrunk

LCOT4(KX-TDA3180)

240 Installation Manual

Page 241: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.3 Options — KX-TDA30

5.3 Options — KX-TDA30

5.3.1 Options

Model No. Model Name DescriptionMaximum Quantity

KX-TDA3105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

Memory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using Digital XDP connection. To be installed in the MEC slot.

1

KX-TDA3161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers.

1

KX-TDA3162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers.

1

KX-TDA3166 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO8)

8-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences.

1

KX-TDA3168 Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID)

Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports.

1

KX-TDA3171 4-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC4)

4-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a Voice Processing System (VPS), and PT-interface CSs.

1

KX-TDA3172 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a VPS, and PT-interface CSs.

2

KX-TDA3173 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC4)

4-port extension card for SLTs. 1

KX-TDA3174 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

8-port extension card for SLTs. 2

KX-TDA3180 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

3

KX-TDA3182 4-Port DID Card (DID4) 4-port DID trunk card. 3

KX-TDA3183 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT2)

2-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

3

KX-TDA3191 2-Channel Message Card (MSG2)

2-channel message card. 2

KX-TDA3193 4-Port Caller ID Card (CID4)

4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT4 card.

3

Installation Manual 241

Page 242: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.3 Options — KX-TDA30

KX-TDA3196 Remote Card (RMT) Analogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be installed in the RMT slot.

1

KX-TDA3280 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2) 2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer (PFT) port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

3

KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1) 1-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

3

KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1 and G.711 compliant.

1

KX-A236 Additional AC Adaptor AC adaptor and AC cord for system expansion.

1

Model No. Model Name DescriptionMaximum Quantity

242 Installation Manual

Page 243: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

5.4.1 General Description

Switching Non-blocking

AC Adaptor AC Input 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 1.5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz

DC Output 40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)

DC Input • DC IN 1: 40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)

• DC IN 2: 40 V, 1.38 A (55.2 W)

External Battery +36 V DC (+12 V DC × 3, battery capacity of 14 Ah or below recommended for each external battery)

Maximum Power Failure Tolerance

300 ms (without using backup batteries)

Memory Backup Duration 7 years

Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Connectors Trunk RJ45/RJ11 (2 wire) × each trunk port

Extension RJ45/RJ11 (4 wire) × each extension port

Paging Output 1 conductor jack

External MOH (Music on Hold) Output

1 conductor jack

Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP

Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 maximum

Operating Environment

Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C

Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)

Conference Call Trunk From 10 × 3-party conference call to 4 × 8-party conference call

Music on Hold 1 port (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)Selectable Tone/External Music Source port

Paging Internal Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps

External 1 port (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)

Serial Interface Port

RS-232C 1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)

USB 1

Installation Manual 243

Page 244: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)

DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2) or2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)

DSS Console and Add-on Key Module 1-pair wire (D1, D2)

Dimension 275 mm (W) × 376 mm (H) × 117 mm (D)

Weight (when fully mounted) Under 3.5 kg

244 Installation Manual

Page 245: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

5.4.2 Characteristics

Terminal Equipment Loop Limit • PT: KX-T7600 series: 90 ; all other DPTs/APTs: 40

• SLT: 600 including set

• Doorphone: 20

• PT-interface CS: 65

Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 minimum

Maximum Number of Extension Instruments per Line

1 for PT or SLT

2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of a PT and an SLT

3 by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of two DPTs and an SLT

Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 maximum

Hookswitch Flash/Recall Timing Range

24 ms to 2032 ms

BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode Supply Voltage: 40 VPower Supply: 4.5 W per 1 line, 5 W per 2 linesPower Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply

Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

Paging Terminal Impedance 600

MOH Terminal Impedance 10 000

Installation Manual 245

Page 246: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

5.4.3 System Capacity

Maximum Trunk and VoIP LineThe Hybrid IP-PBX supports the following number of trunk lines and VoIP lines.

Maximum Terminal EquipmentThe Hybrid IP-PBX supports a maximum of 24 devices; the connected devices can be a combination of SLT, DPT, APT, CS and VPS.Furthermore, 4 additional SLTs can be connected to PTs using the Parallelled Telephone Features (Parallel mode or XDP mode).

NoticeDevices connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX that exceed the system capacity will not function.You must connect an additional AC adaptor in either or both of the following conditions:

• A total of more than 4 APTs and DPTs (except KX-T7600 series, KX-T7560/KX-T7565) are connected.

• More than 4 CSs are connected.

For how to connect an AC adaptor or additional AC adaptor, refer to "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Line Type Maximum Number

Trunk Line 12

VoIP Line 4

Terminal Equipment Type Without an Additional AC Adaptor

With an Additional AC Adaptor

SLT 24 24

KX-T7600 series DPT*1

*1 A total of 24 DPTs, APTs, CSs and VPS can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Total 24 Total 24KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT*1

Other types of DPT and APT*1 Total 4 Total 24

Other types of DPT 4 24

APT 4 4

CS*1 4 8

PS 28 28

VPS*1 4 ports (1 VPS)*2

*2 A maximum of 4 ports (8 channels) of a single VPS can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

4 ports (1 VPS)*2

Doorphone 4 4

Door Opener 4 4

Add-on Key ModuleTotal 24 Total 48

USB Module

246 Installation Manual

Page 247: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

AC Adaptor SelectionIf the Hybrid IP-PBX has BRI extension port, you need to calculate the total "load figure" from the type and number of equipment to be connected, and determine whether or not an additional AC adaptor needs to be connected.

Load Figure Calculation

AC Adaptor CapabilityThe following load figures can be supported.

Equipment Type Load Figure

SLT 0

PT KX-T7600 series DPT and KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT

0

Other types of DPT 4

APT 4

CS 4

ISDN Telephone 1*1

*1 If the connected ISDN telephone has an external power source, its load figure is "0".

Connected AC Adaptor Maximum

Supplied AC Adaptor only 32

Supplied AC Adaptor and Additional AC Adaptor

96*1

*1 If the load figure exceeds "96", it cannot be supported by the KX-TDA30. In this case, use the KX-TDA100 with M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M), or the KX-TDA200 with either PSU-M or L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L).

Installation Manual 247

Page 248: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

5.4 Specifications — KX-TDA30

248 Installation Manual

Page 249: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 6

Installation — KX-TDA30

This section describes the procedures to install the Hybrid IP-PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.

Installation Manual 249

Page 250: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA30

6.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA30

6.1.1 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the Hybrid IP-PBX. Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

Safety Installation InstructionsWhen installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

5. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.

Installation PrecautionsThis set is made for wall mounting. Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discolouration.)

1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places.Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C

2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.

3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.

4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.

5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.

6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment.)

7. Closer than 1.8 m to radios and televisions (both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PTs).

8. Do not obstruct the area around the Hybrid IP-PBX (for reasons of maintenance and inspection—be especially careful to allow at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of the Hybrid IP-PBX for cooling).

9. Do not block the openings at top of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

10. Do not stack up the optional service cards. To avoid damage to the optional service cards, always use the extension bolts.

Wiring PrecautionsBe sure to follow these instructions when wiring.

1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.

2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on. Avoid wiring under carpets.

250 Installation Manual

Page 251: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.1 Before Installation — KX-TDA30

3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the Hybrid IP-PBX operation may be interrupted by the inducted noise from such equipment.

4. Please use 1-pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such as standard telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, Voice Processing Systems, etc., except PTs (e.g., KX-T7600 series).

5. The power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be off during wiring. After the wiring is completed, turn the power switch on.

6. Mis-wiring may cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to operate improperly.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX off and on again.

8. The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a 3-wire earthing type plug. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing-type plug.

9. Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.

10. Trunks should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to "6.2.11 Lightning Protector Installation".

Installation Manual 251

Page 252: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.1 Unpacking

Unpack the box and check the items below:

Main Unit 1

AC Cord 1

AC Adaptor 1

Screws for Wall Mounting 5

Washers for Wall Mounting 5

Mini Plug (for pager and music source) 2

SD Memory Card 1

Main Strap 1

Optional Card Label Sheet 1

252 Installation Manual

Page 253: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.2 Names and Locations

SD Memory Card Slot CoverReset Button

MOH port

Pager port

Super HybridPorts

RS-232C port

USB port

System Initialise Switch

DC IN 2DC IN 1

Earth Terminal

Battery Connector

Power Switch

Installation Manual 253

Page 254: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers

Opening the Covers1. Pull the slide button to the right and, holding it, slide the cable cover upwards. Then turn

the cable cover slightly to remove it.

2. Remove the three screws.

3. Holding the protrusions on both sides of the front cover, swing the cover open.

Slide Button

Cable Cover

Screw

254 Installation Manual

Page 255: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Removing/Attaching the Front CoverIf you prefer, you can remove the front cover.

Removing the Front Cover

Holding the front cover open at about a 45° angle, remove the front cover by pushing it in the direction of the arrow as shown below.

Attaching the Front Cover

Fit the front cover to the main unit as shown below, and then close the front cover.

Installation Manual 255

Page 256: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Closing the Covers1. Close the front cover, then tighten the three screws.

2. Attach the rear hooks on the cable cover to the main unit, then swing the cable cover closed so that the front hooks fit in place.

3. Slide the cable cover down until it locks.

Screw

Cable Cover

256 Installation Manual

Page 257: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card

CAUTION• Use only the SD Memory Card included with the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the Hybrid IP-PBX and all the customer data. The SD Memory Card must be inserted before start up.

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card during the operation of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Removing the SD Memory Card during operation may cause damage to the SD Memory Card, or result in loss of data.

LED Indications

NoteIf you need to remove the SD Memory Card:

Indication Colour Description

SD ACCESS Green SD memory card status

• ON: Accessing

SD Memory CardSlot Cover

SD MemoryCard

LED

Installation Manual 257

Page 258: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.5 Frame Earth Connection

IMPORTANTConnect the frame of the Hybrid IP-PBX to earth.

• Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX from the bad effects of external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the case of lightning strike.

• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against the external noise and lightning strikes, but it may not be enough to protect the Hybrid IP-PBX. A permanent connection between earth and the earth terminal of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be made.

1. Loosen the screw.

2. Insert an earthing wire (user-supplied)*.

3. Tighten the screw.

4. Connect the earthing wire to earth.

* For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.

Screw

Earthingwire

To earth

258 Installation Manual

Page 259: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the Hybrid IP-PBX in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain the power to the Hybrid IP-PBX without interruption.

1. Turn off the power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX.

2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable with 3 identical VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries (12 V DC × 3).

• Turn on the power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX only after the installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX is finished and AC power is available.

• For each backup battery, battery capacity of 14 Ah or below is recommended (otherwise, the battery charge may not be maintained).

• Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.

• The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up Battery Cable and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the backup batteries in ventilated place.

• For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual intended for the batteries.

CAUTION• Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

• Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.

• Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.

• There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Back-up Battery Cable

Backup Batteries (12 V DC x 3)

Red Black

Battery Connector

Fuse

Power Switch

Installation Manual 259

Page 260: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Slot Position

Slot Restrictions

The following table shows the slot restrictions. " " indicates that the slot supports the optional service card.

*1 Slots 10 and 11 accept only cards which do not have external ports. Therefore, these slots do not have removable cover plates.

*2 Slot 01 contains the pre-installed Super Hybrid Ports. No optional service card can be installed.

Card Slot Number

Type Max 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

LCOT4 3

LCOT2 3

DID4 3

BRI2 3

BRI1 3

DLC41*1

SLC4

IP-GW4 1

DLC82*2

SLC8

DPH41*3

DPH2

ECHO8 1

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10*1

11*1

01*2

260 Installation Manual

Page 261: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

CAUTIONTo protect the main board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the main board or on the optional service cards. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

Notes

• When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch of the Hybrid IP-PBX must be in the off position.

• For each card, the maximum number that can be installed in the Hybrid IP-PBX is listed in "5.3.1 Options".

• Any card that exceeds the capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX will be ignored.

• When the Hybrid IP-PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.

Installing Optional Service Cards1. Before installing the optional service cards, cut and remove the appropriate dummy cover

plates from the main unit.

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, smooth the cut edges after removing the dummy cover plates.

EXT-CID 1

MSG2 2

*1 Only one of either DLC4 or SLC4 card can be installed.*2 A maximum of two DLC8 cards, two SLC8 cards, or one of each card can be installed.*3 Only one of either DPH4 or DPH2 card can be installed.

Card Slot Number

Type Max 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

Dummy Cover Plate

Installation Manual 261

Page 262: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

2. Position the card in the open slot, making sure that the tabs on the both sides of the card fit into place. Then, holding the card firmly in place, lower the rear end so that the hole of the card fits over the extension bolt.

CAUTIONWhen installing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main board. Doing so may result in damage to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

3. Insert the new extension bolt (included with the card) into the hole on the card, and tighten it to secure the card.

1

2

Extension Bolt

Optional Service Card

Extension Bolt

262 Installation Manual

Page 263: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

4. Stick an appropriate optional card label (included) to the left side of the corresponding card.

5. Connect a cable to an appropriate port of the card.For details about pin assignments, refer to the appropriate section in "6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30" and "6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30".

NoteMake sure to connect cables after installing the card in the Hybrid IP-PBX, not before.

Optional Card Label

Installation Manual 263

Page 264: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6. Repeat the procedure for other cards.

A. When installing a card in Slot 07, make sure to detach the LED holder first. After installing the card, reattach the LED holder.

To detach the LED holder

To attach the LED holder

LED holder

264 Installation Manual

Page 265: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

B. When installing a card in Slot 11, tighten the card using the screw included with the card, instead of the extension bolt.

Screw

Installation Manual 265

Page 266: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Handling of the Cables1. Attach the strap included with the card to one of the connected cables.

2. Bind all the connected cables together using the strap.

3. Repeat the procedure for other cards.

Strap

266 Installation Manual

Page 267: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

4. Attach the main strap (included with the Hybrid IP-PBX) to any of the 5 rails depending on your preference.

2

1

Main Strap

Installation Manual 267

Page 268: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

5. Bind all the connected cables together using the main strap, and then close the cable cover. For how to close the cable cover, refer to "6.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers".

Notes

• For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the cables.

• If you prefer, you can cut the other side of the cable cover and run the cables through that opening. For safety reasons, smooth the cut edges.

Main Strap

Cable Cover

268 Installation Manual

Page 269: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Removing the Optional Service Cards1. Loosen and remove the extension bolt.

2. Holding the protrusions of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.

CAUTIONWhen removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main board. Doing so may result in damage to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Installation Manual 269

Page 270: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.8 Types of Connectors

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

(Twisted pair cable)

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161NE)

• DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)

• DLC4 (KX-TDA3171NE)

• DLC8 (KX-TDA3172NE)

• SLC4 (KX-TDA3173NE)

• SLC8 (KX-TDA3174NE)

• LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180NE)

• LCOT2 (KX-TDA3183)

• BRI2 (KX-TDA3280)

• BRI1 (KX-TDA3283)

• IP-GW4 (KX-TDA3480)

• Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*1

(Twisted pair cable)

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)

• DLC4 (KX-TDA3171)

• DLC8 (KX-TDA3172)

• SLC4 (KX-TDA3173)

• SLC8 (KX-TDA3174)

• LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180)

• DID4 (KX-TDA3182)

• Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*2

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)

• DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)

• Main Board

• Main Board

• Main Board (Pager port, MOH port)

RJ45

1 8

RJ11

4 1

10-pinTerminal Block

8-pinTerminal Block 81

101

RS-232C

6 9

1 5

USB2

3

1

4

Mini Plug+

-

270 Installation Manual

Page 271: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

*1 The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, and the KX-TDA30GR have the Super Hybrid Ports with RJ45 connectors.*2 Other models of the KX-TDA30 (other than the KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, and the KX-TDA30GR) have the

Super Hybrid Ports with RJ11 connectors.

Installation Manual 271

Page 272: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.9 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)

Mounting on Wooden Wall1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark

the 3 screw positions.

2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

Notes

• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of the cabinet.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

250 mm

130 mm

Washer

Drive the screwto this position.

272 Installation Manual

Page 273: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall

CAUTIONDrive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal plates in the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.

2. Install three anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.

4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

250 mm

130 mm

Hammer

29 mm

Anchor Plug

6.4 mm

Drive the screwto this position.

Installation Manual 273

Page 274: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Notes• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10

cm at the sides of the cabinet.

• Make sure that the wall behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

274 Installation Manual

Page 275: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.10 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Mounting on Wooden Wall1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2

screw positions.

2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.

NoteBe careful not to drop the AC adaptor.

110 mm

Washer

Drive the screwto this position.

Installation Manual 275

Page 276: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall

CAUTIONDrive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal plates in the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

2. Install two anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.

4. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.

NoteBe careful not to drop the AC adaptor.

110 mm

Hammer

29 mm

Anchor Plug

6.4 mm

Drive the screwto this position.

276 Installation Manual

Page 277: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

NoteWhen you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from the measurement indicated above.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

110 mm

Installation Manual 277

Page 278: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.2.11 Lightning Protector Installation

OverviewA lightning protector is a device that must be installed on a trunk to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging equipment.

A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Trouble due to lightning surges has been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic equipment.

In many countries/areas, there are regulations requiring the installation of lightning protection. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.

The Hybrid IP-PBX must be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, earthing (connection to earth) is very important for the protection of the user.

Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., law, guidelines).

Recommended Lightning Protectors• KX-A207

• TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• Krone 237A strips fitted with 14A/1 surge arrestors

• Super MAX™ (PANAMAX)

• MP1 (ITW LINK)

Installation

CS

Trunk Trunk Trunk

Extn.

Extn. Extn. Extn.

Extn.: Extension line

LightningProtectors

TerminalBoard

HybridIP-PBX

FrameEarthSLT

Earth

PT

278 Installation Manual

Page 279: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

Outside Installation

If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:

a. Install the extension wire underground.

b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.

Note

The lightning protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.

Installation of an Earth Rod

1. Installation location of the earth rod.....Near the protector

CSSLT PT

(Main Building)

Trunk

Trunk

Extn.

Extn.

Extn.: Extension Line

Earth

(Another Building)

Extn. Extn.

Lightning Protectors

TerminalBoard Lightning

Protector

SLT

PTHybridIP-PBX CS

Trunk

HybridIP-PBX

EarthingWire

Earth Rod(Underground)

Lightning Protector

Installation Manual 279

Page 280: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.2 Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

2. Check obstructions.....None

3. Composition of the earth rod.....Metal

4. Depth of the earth rod.....More than 50 cm

5. Cross sectional area of the earthing wire.....More than 1.3 mm2

Notes

• The above figures are recommendations only.

• The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

280 Installation Manual

Page 281: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.1 LCOT4 Card

Function4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID4 card can be mounted on the LCOT4 card (refer to "6.3.4 CID4 Card").

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Notice

The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Notes

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "6.11.1 Power Failure Connections".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

To trunk

RJ45

PFT Port 1

PFT Port 2

9 161 8

T R T R

Installation Manual 281

Page 282: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved4 1

T R

282 Installation Manual

Page 283: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.2 LCOT2 Card

Function2-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "6.11.1 Power Failure Connections".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

To trunk

RJ45

PFT Port 1

PFT Port 2

9 161 8

T R T R

Installation Manual 283

Page 284: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.3 DID4 Card

Function4-port DID trunk card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note

To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Pin Assignments

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

To trunk

RJ11

4 1

T R

284 Installation Manual

Page 285: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.4 CID4 Card

Function4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT4 card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): none

NoteIf you need to remove the CID4 Card:

CID4 Card

LCOT4 Card

Installation Manual 285

Page 286: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.5 BRI2 Card

Function2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer (PFT) port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.

• This optional service card has 100 of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection, the card must be placed at the end of the bus.

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "6.11.1 Power Failure Connections".

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Notice

If the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied from the BRI2 card by programming the Hybrid IP-PBX accordingly.

However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power supplied to the terminal from the BRI2 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit of the BRI2 card or the terminal.

Switch Settings

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

To NT1/Extension

RJ45 (LINE 1)RJ45 (LINE 2)

LED 1LED 2

A B A BOR

286 Installation Manual

Page 287: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

LED Indications

LINE LED Pattern

Signal Name Level [V] Function

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

Indication Colour Description

LINE 1 Green LINE 1 status indication:

Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

LINE 2 Green LINE 2 status indication:

Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

L1 L2 Master Clock

LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF

ON OFF OFF

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

1 s

1 s

Installation Manual 287

Page 288: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

L1: ON (Synchronous)

L2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)

Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the Hybrid IP-PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:

ON ON OFF

ON OFF ON

ON ON ON

L1 L2 Master Clock

LED Pattern

1 s

1 s

1 s

CAT 5: Under 1000 m

TE

Point-to-Point

ExpansionPoint-to-Multipoint

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

TE 8TE 1

CAT 5: Under 150 m

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m

288 Installation Manual

Page 289: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.6 BRI1 Card

Function1-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.

• This optional service card has 100 of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection, the card must be placed at the end of the bus.

• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

NoticeIf the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied from the BRI1 card by programming the Hybrid IP-PBX accordingly.

However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power supplied to the terminal from the BRI1 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit of the BRI1 card or the terminal.

Switch Settings

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

To NT1/Extension

RJ45

LEDA B A B

OR

Installation Manual 289

Page 290: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

LED Indications

LINE LED Pattern

Signal Name Level [V] Function

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

Indication Colour Description

LINE 1 Green LINE 1 status indication:

Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

L1 L2 Master Clock

LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF

ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

1 s

1 s

1 s

290 Installation Manual

Page 291: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

L1: ON (Synchronous)

L2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)

Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus ConnectionThe maximum distance of the extension cable that connects the Hybrid IP-PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is shown below:

ON OFF ON

ON ON ON

L1 L2 Master Clock

LED Pattern

1 s

1 s

CAT 5: Under 1000 m

TE

Point-to-Point

ExpansionPoint-to-Multipoint

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

TE 8TE 1

CAT 5: Under 150 m

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m

Installation Manual 291

Page 292: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

6.3.7 IP-GW4 Card

Function4-channel VoIP gateway card. VoIP H.323 V.2, ITU-T G.729a, G.723.1 and G.711 compliant.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Notes

• Maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.

• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4 card, refer to the documentation for the IP-GW4 card.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

TPO+ O Transmit data+

TPO- O Transmit data-

TPI+ I Receive data+

TPI- I Receive data-

– – Reserved

To privateIP network

RJ45

LEDs

1 8

TPO+TPO-

TPI+TPI-

292 Installation Manual

Page 293: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.3 Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30

LED Indications

Indication Colour Description

ON LINE Green On-line status indication

• ON: On-line mode

• OFF: Off-line mode

• Flashing: Maintenance mode

NoteIf the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be OFF.

ALARM Red Alarm indication

• ON: Alarm

• OFF: Normal

LINK Green Link status indication

• ON: Normal Connection

• OFF: Connection Error

DATA Green Data transmission indication

• ON: Data transmitting

• OFF: No data transmitted

Installation Manual 293

Page 294: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

6.4.1 DLC4 Card

Function4-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a Voice Processing System (VPS), and PT-interface CSs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoticeThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Note

For details about connecting the CS, refer to "6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

To extension

RJ45

9 161 8

D2 D1 D2 D1

294 Installation Manual

Page 295: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved4 1

D2 D1

Installation Manual 295

Page 296: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

6.4.2 SLC4 Card

Function4-port extension card for SLTs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Notice

The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

Signal Name Function

T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

To extension

RJ45

9 161 8

R T R T

4 1

R T

296 Installation Manual

Page 297: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

6.4.3 DLC8 Card

Function8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a VPS, and PT-interface CSs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Notice

The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

NoteFor details about connecting the CS, refer to "6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

To extension

RJ45

9 161 8

D2 D1 D2 D1

25 3217 24

D2 D1 D2 D1

Installation Manual 297

Page 298: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved4 1

D2 D1

298 Installation Manual

Page 299: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.4 Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30

6.4.4 SLC8 Card

Function8-port extension card for SLTs.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt ×1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Notice

The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

Signal Name Function

T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

To extension

RJ45

9 161 8

R T R T

25 3217 24

R T R T

4 1

R T

Installation Manual 299

Page 300: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.1 DPH4 Card

Function4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers.

Accessory and User-supplied Items

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Notice

The connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Shown above is a card having the RJ45 connectors.

NoteFor details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1, 8-pin terminal block × 1, 10-pin terminal block × 1, Telephone Line Cord × 2, Terminal Box × 1 (for DPH4 card with RJ45 connectors) or 2 (for DPH4 card with RJ11 connectors)

To doorphonesTo door openers

Telephone Line Cord

8-pin10-pin

300 Installation Manual

Page 301: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

RJ11 Connector

8-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit

DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

com1 Doorphone 1 receive

com2 Doorphone 2 receive

DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit

com3 Doorphone 3 receive

com4 Doorphone 4 receive

– Reserved

Signal Name Function

DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit

DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

com1 Doorphone 1 receive

com2 Doorphone 2 receive

DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit

com3 Doorphone 3 receive

com4 Doorphone 4 receive

Signal Name Function

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

1 8

DP2DP1

com1com2

9 16

DP4DP3

com3com4

DP2DP1com1

com2

DP4DP3com3

com4

5 81 4

1 8

Installation Manual 301

Page 302: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

10-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

OP1b Door opener 1

OP1a Door opener 1 com

OP2b Door opener 2

OP2a Door opener 2 com

OP3b Door opener 3

OP3a Door opener 3 com

OP4b Door opener 4

OP4a Door opener 4 com

– Reserved

1 10

OP1bOP1a

OP2bOP2a

OP3bOP3a

OP4bOP4a

302 Installation Manual

Page 303: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.2 DPH2 Card

Function2-port doorphone card for 2 German type doorphones and 2 door openers.

Accessory and User-supplied Items

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Note

For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers".

Accessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1, 8-pin terminal block × 1, 10-pin terminal block × 1, Telephone Line Cord × 2, Terminal Box × 1

To doorphones/door openers

8-pin

10-pin

RJ45

Telephone Line Cord

Installation Manual 303

Page 304: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector

8-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

OP1b Door opener 1

OP1a Door opener 1 com

Path_1b Doorphone 1 transmit

Path_1a Doorphone 1 receive

Call_1b Doorphone 1 call button

Call_1a Doorphone 1 call button com

DC1b Doorphone control 1

DC1a Doorphone control 1 com

OP2b Door opener 2

OP2a Door opener 2 com

Path_2b Doorphone 2 transmit

Path_2a Doorphone 2 receive

Call_2b Doorphone 2 call button

Call_2a Doorphone 2 call button com

DC2b Doorphone control 2

DC2a Doorphone control 2 com

Signal Name Function

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

1 8 9 16

OP1bOP1a

Path_1bPath_1a

Call_1bCall_1a

DC1bDC1a

OP2bOP2a

Path_2bPath_2a

Call_2bCall_2a

DC2bDC2a

1 8

304 Installation Manual

Page 305: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

10-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

– Reserved

1 10

Installation Manual 305

Page 306: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.3 ECHO8 Card

Function8-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Screw × 1

User-supplied (not included): none

NoteTo establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO8 card and enable the echo cancellation for conference using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console (refer to "7.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration").

306 Installation Manual

Page 307: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.4 MSG2 Card

Function2-channel message card.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Screw × 1

User-supplied (not included): none

Installation Manual 307

Page 308: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.5 EXT-CID Card

FunctionSends Caller ID signals to extension ports.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Screw × 1

User-supplied (not included): none

308 Installation Manual

Page 309: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.6 MEC Card

FunctionMemory expansion card for Broadcasting features and to double the number of DPTs, using Digital XDP connection. To be installed in the MEC slot.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): none

CAUTIONMake sure to insert the MEC card between the guide rails until it locks into the MEC slot. Push the card firmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.

MEC Card

MEC Slot

Installation Manual 309

Page 310: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

Removing the MEC CardPull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove the MEC card.

310 Installation Manual

Page 311: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

6.5.7 RMT Card

FunctionAnalogue modem card for remote communication with the Hybrid IP-PBX. V90 support. To be installed in the RMT slot.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): none

User-supplied (not included): none

CAUTIONMake sure to insert the RMT card between the guide rails until it locks into the RMT slot. Push the card firmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.

RMT Slot

RMT Card

Installation Manual 311

Page 312: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.5 Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30

Removing the RMT CardPull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove the RMT card.

312 Installation Manual

Page 313: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

6.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

" " indicates that the extension card or Super Hybrid Ports support the terminal.

PT-interface CS

DPT APT Console SLT

Super Hybrid Ports(Main Board)

SLC4, SLC8 Cards

DLC4, DLC8 Cards

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 500 m ø 0.5 mm: Under 720 mø 0.6 mm: Under 830 mCAT 5: Under 720 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 140 m ø 0.5 mm: Under 229 mø 0.6 mm: Under 360 mCAT 5: Under 229 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 698 mø 0.5 mm: Under 1128 mø 0.6 mm: Under 1798 mCAT 5: Under 1128 m

Other PT and DSS Console

SLT

KX-T7600 Series

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

PT-interface CS

Installation Manual 313

Page 314: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

6.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.

NoteIn addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT.

With APT

With DPTParallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.

If the XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To a Super Hybrid Port

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1",and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

SLTAPT

ModularT-Adaptor

To a Super Hybrid Port

SLTDPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

314 Installation Manual

Page 315: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

Using an EXtra Device PortWith KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)

With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)

To a Super Hybrid Port

DPT

To a Super Hybrid PortTo SLT

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

SLT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

To a Super Hybrid Port

DPT SLT

To a Super Hybrid Port To SLT

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

TO TEL

TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT

Installation Manual 315

Page 316: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

6.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connected to a Super Hybrid Port, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.

Notes• Both DPTs must be KX-T7600 series DPTs (excluding KX-T7640).

• Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.

• If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to "1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further information.

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

316 Installation Manual

Page 317: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

Using an Extra Device Port

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R","D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 317

Page 318: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

With KX-T7600E Series DPT

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

ModularT-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

318 Installation Manual

Page 319: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

Using an Extra Device PortConnecting to a Slave DPT

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 319

Page 320: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

Connecting to a Master DPT

SLT

To slave DPT

To SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cordConnect pins "T", "R", "D1" and "D2".

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

Back View of DPTs

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 30 mø 0.5 mm: Under 50 mø 0.6 mm: Under 60 mCAT 5: Under 50 m

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port(for connection of SLT)

320 Installation Manual

Page 321: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.6 Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30

6.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

CTI connection between a PC and a KX-T7633/T7636 DPT provides first party call control. The CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 1.1), and uses the CSTA Phase 3 protocol.

A USB Module (KX-T7601) must be connected to the KX-T7633/T7636 DPT.

Note

The operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Notes• Maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

• USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection. In a Digital XDP connection, the PC cannot be used. If a USB module is connected to a slave DPT, the DPT will not work properly.

USB Cable

To PC

ULL

USB Port

USB Module

Installation Manual 321

Page 322: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.1 Overview

The following equipment is required to connect the wireless system:

CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0141CE)This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

Note for users in Europe

This Cell Station Unit for DECT is for connection to a Panasonic PBX of a European country.

PS: DECT Portable Station (KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590/KX-TD7580)The KX-TDA30 can support up to 28 PSs. For more details about the PS, please refer to the PS Operating Instructions.

RF Specification

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C),

low temperature (less than 0 °C), vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

Item Description

Radio Access Method Multi Carrier TDMA-TDD

Frequency Band 1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1

*1 The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz.

Number of Carriers 10*2

*2 The number may vary depending on the country/area. In Taiwan, it is 8.

Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz

Bit Rate 1152 kbps

Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame

Frame Length 10 ms

Modulation Scheme GFSK

Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter

Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding

Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)

Transmission Output Average 10 mW

Peak 250 mW

322 Installation Manual

Page 323: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).

• The CS should not be placed near high voltage equipment.

• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

• Do not use this wireless system near another high power cordless system such as DECT or SS wireless.

• Keep the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or the disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax machine, etc., or microwaves

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

Hybrid IP-PBX and CS More than 2 m

Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal channels each CS can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

Installation Manual 323

Page 324: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Site surveys can be conducted using the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS. Inadvertent site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "6.7.3 Site Planning".

a. Obtain the map of the CS installation site.

b. Consider the service area demanded by the user on the map.

c. Plan the locations of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials and etc.

2. Prepare for site surveyRefer to "6.7.4 Before Site Survey".

a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.

b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.

c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Notes• Install at least 2 m above the floor.

• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590".

a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength weakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least 5 m.

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

324 Installation Manual

Page 325: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area demanded by the user.

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "6.7.6 After Site Survey".

a. Return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position, and stop supplying power.

b. Turn off the PS.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX and test the operationRefer to "6.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

a. Connect the CSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Register the PSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "6.7.8 Wall Mounting".

a. Assuming everything goes as planned, mount the CS on the wall.

Installation Manual 325

Page 326: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the building.

Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.

The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.

1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal.

2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.

3. Radio waves penetrate objects like those made of glass.

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than

the number of obstacles.

• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.

• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.

• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.

• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from various materials.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

326 Installation Manual

Page 327: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered with heat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate windows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetrate them.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

Installation Manual 327

Page 328: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed where there is no obstacle.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590").

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain the map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).

b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).

c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.

d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area demanded by the user on the map, referring to the following example.

a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area to 30 m to 60 m in one direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage AreaRadio signal strength level is greater than "3".(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage AreaRadio signal strengthlevel is greater than "8".(About 30 m to 40 m)Good conversationwill be kept.

Out of Service:Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnectsMay receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

328 Installation Manual

Page 329: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage areas of adjacent CSs.Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by WallsThings to take note of:

• The room is separated by walls.

• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.

CS installation plan:

• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as much it does where there is no obstacle, because the radio signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

Installation Manual 329

Page 330: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.4 Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TCA255 or KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.

NoteThe display language for the site survey is only in English.

Checking the CS ID NumberCheck the CS ID number label attached to the CS.

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PSUsing the KX-TCA255

Note

To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

A: + C: + E: +

B: + D: + F: +

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

3DEF

4GHI0

1 5JKL

2ABC

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

330 Installation Manual

Page 331: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Using the KX-TD7590

Note

To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

F1

F2

F3

INT'

OKA: C: E:

B: D: F:

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

Installation Manual 331

Page 332: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.

2. Set the channel number switches as desired.

Notes

• To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a channel number must be set for each CS.

• If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.

Channel Number Switch

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal Test Switch

Channel 0

1

2

3

4

332 Installation Manual

Page 333: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

3. After setting the DIP switch, connect an AC adaptor or battery box to the CS using a power supply adaptor.

Note for users in the United Kingdom240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a battery box to the CS.

4. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping the antennas in the upright position.

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)Modular

Telephone Cord

Installation Manual 333

Page 334: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. In the Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength of the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as planned during site planning, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal StrengthAfter locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. The PS scans whether there is a CS that can link with on channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test mode. The channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 9.

1. Enter the Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Notes*1: Channel number

*2: Slot number

*3: When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.

*4: Radio signal strength level

*5: Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number of errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greater radio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frame error is "0000".

CAUTIONStoring the scan data will clear all directory data.

0 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:9005301234

0

Display example:

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:90053012340 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

334 Installation Manual

Page 335: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving to and away from the CS.

a. Move to the CS until the point the radio signal strength level becomes "12".

b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.

c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.

a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

Channel no. 0

PS

PS

PS CH0L:03

CH0L:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

CH0L:08

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnectsMay receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

5 m to 10 mChannel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Installation Manual 335

Page 336: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area demanded by the user.

Notes• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are

saved each time. If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement of 10 channels × 24 slots in total can be made.

• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many error counters), change the location of the CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

336 Installation Manual

Page 337: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Clearing the Stored Scan DataWhen "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the scan data.

Using the KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 9 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/A a

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 9 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 9 4GHI

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 9 4GHI

Installation Manual 337

Page 338: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit the Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

1. Keep pressing POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.

2. Disconnect the AC adaptor or battery box from the CS and stop supplying electricity.

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

338 Installation Manual

Page 339: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Note

For details about DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "6.4.1 DLC4 Card" or "6.4.3 DLC8 Card".

Signal Name Signal NamePin No.1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

Pin No.1234

A Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ11)

CS (RJ11)

Signal Name

Signal NamePin No.1234

D1

D2

D2

Pin No.1234

D15678

A Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

Super Hybrid Port

Installation Manual 339

Page 340: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

340 Installation Manual

Page 341: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and Hybrid IP-PBX is required. A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the Hybrid IP-PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" and "3.3 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide.

Entering the Hybrid IP-PBX System Programming Mode Using a PTAdministrator Level

Note

means default value.

PS RegistrationOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different Hybrid IP-PBXs.

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

[690]001 to 028

PS No.1 to 4 digits END

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

"Please wait".

"Enter Base PIN".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

Installation Manual 341

Page 342: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Using the KX-TD7590System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system lock password will be required for system setting.

Using the KX-TD7580

Select "DECT-SYS1-4"

Choose "ENABLE/DISABLE".

System Lock Password

System Lock Password

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

4 digits

4 digits

ENABLE

F

/

/

SELECT

SELECT

SELECT

/OK

/OK

To set system lock

F

DISABLE

OR

To register for the first time

To re-register

/Select "INITIAL SETTING".

SELECT

/Select "PS-PROGRAM".

SELECT/

Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password

Select "REGISTRATION".

/4 digits

PIN for PS Registration /OK

C.Tone

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /C.Tone

4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

342 Installation Manual

Page 343: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong Hybrid IP-PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Before registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX, register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX with the matching PIN.

Notes• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PS.

Therefore, the PS can be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX without setting the PIN.

• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Therefore, even when there is more than 1 Hybrid IP-PBX with the same PIN near the PS, the PS will not be linked to a different Hybrid IP-PBX during normal operation after registration.

Setting the PIN for Hybrid IP-PBX

Changing the Display Language of the PSUsing the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Using the KX-TD7580

[692]1 to 4 digits

PIN for PS RegistrationEND

ENTER ENTER1234

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/Select "DISPLAY SETTING".

Select the desiredlanguage.

Select "LANGUAGE".

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

F

/

/SELECT

SELECTSELECT

0SELECT

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /

Installation Manual 343

Page 344: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:

• PS is turned on.

• PS is within the range.

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255

Using the KX-TD7590

Using the KX-TD7580

[691]001 to 028

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

END

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".

4 digits

Handset PIN

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone

Select "YES".

Select "Cancel Base".

Select thedesired item.

F

/

0 /Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password /Select "CANCELDECT-SYS".

SELECT

SELECT/

Select "YES". C.Tone

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

SELECT

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Cancel Base".

Select "Registration".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/

C.Tone

4 digits

Handset PINSelect thedesired item.

/

Select "YES".

/

344 Installation Manual

Page 345: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 345

Page 346: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.7.8 Wall Mounting

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

346 Installation Manual

Page 347: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

NoteWhen you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from the measurement indicated above.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

Installation Manual 347

Page 348: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.1 Overview

The following equipment is required to connect the wireless system:

CS: Cell Station (KX-TDA0141)This unit determines the area covered by the wireless system. Up to 2 calls can be made at the same time through each CS.

PS: 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TD7680/KX-TD7690)The KX-TDA30 can support up to 28 PSs. For more details about the PS, refer to the PS Operating Instructions.

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C),

low temperature (less than 0 °C), vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).

• The CS should not be placed near high voltage equipment.

• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

• Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere with the KX-TDA wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor noise.

• Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent interference. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax machine, etc.

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

Hybrid IP-PBX and CS More than 2 m

CS and CS More than 15 m

Please take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning. Please consult a certified dealer for details.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

348 Installation Manual

Page 349: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care to conduct a site survey. Inadvertent site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "6.8.3 Site Planning".

a. Obtain the map of the CS installation site.

b. Consider the service area demanded by the user on the map.

c. Plan the locations of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials and etc.

2. Prepare the CS for site surveyRefer to "6.8.4 Before Site Survey".

a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.

b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor or a battery box.

c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Notes• Install at least 2 m above the floor.

• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "6.8.5 Site Survey".

a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength weakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least 5 m.

e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area demanded by the user.

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 9 0

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 99 0

Installation Manual 349

Page 350: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "6.8.6 After Site Survey".

a. Return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position, and stop supplying power.

b. Turn off the PS.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX and test the operationRefer to "6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX".

a. Connect the CSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Register the PSs to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "6.8.8 Wall Mounting".

a. Assuming everything goes as planned, mount the CS on the wall.

350 Installation Manual

Page 351: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the building.

Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.

The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.

1. Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal.

2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.

3. Radio waves penetrate objects like those made of glass.

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than

the number of obstacles.

• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.

• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.

• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.

• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from various materials.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

Installation Manual 351

Page 352: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire nets Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered with heat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate windows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetrate them.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

352 Installation Manual

Page 353: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed where there is no obstacle.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "6.8.5 Site Survey").

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain the map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).

b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).

c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.

d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area demanded by the user on the map, referring to the following example.

a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area to 30 m to 60 m in one direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage AreaRadio signal strength level is greater than "3".(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage AreaRadio signal strengthlevel is greater than "8".(About 30 m to 40 m)Good conversationwill be kept.

Out of Service:Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnectsMay receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

Installation Manual 353

Page 354: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage areas of adjacent CSs.Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some handover delay. The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This also applies in the case of interference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by WallsThings to take note of:

• The room is separated by walls.

• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.

CS installation plan:

• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as much it does where there is no obstacle, because the radio signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

354 Installation Manual

Page 355: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.4 Before Site Survey

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.

2. Set the CS number switches as desired.

Notes

• To see the radio signal strength of more than 1 CS, a CS number must be set for each CS.

• If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS number.

CS Number Switch

CS no. 1 CS no. 2 CS no. 3 CS no. 4 CS no. 5 CS no. 6 CS no. 7 CS no. 8 CS no. 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal Test Switch

Installation Manual 355

Page 356: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

3. After setting the DIP switch, connect an AC adaptor or battery box to the CS using a power supply adaptor.

4. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping the antennas in the upright position.

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)Modular

Telephone Cord

356 Installation Manual

Page 357: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.5 Site Survey

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily, set the PS to the Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS coverage area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal Strength

Note

The display language for the site survey is only in English.

1. Enter the Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Notes

*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.

*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number; stored memory space will be indicated by a "-".

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.To store the scan data

0

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.To store the scan data

0

Installation Manual 357

Page 358: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving to and away from the CS.

a. Move to the CS until the point the radio signal strength level becomes "12".

b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.

c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.

a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

CS no. 1

PS

PS

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

CS NO.1 LEVEL:8

Out of rangeReceives noise easily or disconnects May receive noiseGoodBetter

Level: 00Level: 01 to 02Level: 03 to 07Level: 08 to 10 Level: 11 to 12

5 m to 10 mCS no. 1 CS no. 2

358 Installation Manual

Page 359: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area demanded by the user.

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

CS no. 1 CS no. 2

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 9 1

Display example:When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 9 1

Display example:When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Installation Manual 359

Page 360: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Deleting the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 9

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 9

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

360 Installation Manual

Page 361: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit the Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

1. Keep pressing POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.

2. Disconnect the AC adaptor or battery box from the CS and stop supplying electricity.

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Installation Manual 361

Page 362: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Accessory and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessory (included): Screws × 2, Washers × 2

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

Note

For details about DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "6.4.1 DLC4 Card" or "6.4.3 DLC8 Card".

Signal Name Signal NamePin No.1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

Pin No.1234

A Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ11)

CS (RJ11)

Signal Name

Signal NamePin No.1234

D1

D2

D2

Pin No.1234

D15678

A Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 222 mø 0.5 mm: Under 347 mø 0.6 mm: Under 500 mCAT 5: Under 347 m

Super Hybrid Port

362 Installation Manual

Page 363: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port,or DLC4/DLC8 card

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

Installation Manual 363

Page 364: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and Hybrid IP-PBX is required. A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the Hybrid IP-PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" and "3.3 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide.

Entering the System Programming ModePT (Administrator Level)

PS (Using the KX-TD7680)

PS (Using the KX-TD7690)

Note

means default value throughout this section.

PS Registration

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SET".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock PasswordIf required

FUNC

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SETTING".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

S1 S1

MENU SEL

S1

SEL

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock PasswordIf required

ENTR

S1

[690]001 to 028

PS No.1 to 4 digits END

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.

364 Installation Manual

Page 365: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

When the PS has not been registered yetWhen registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You do not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

When the PS has already been registered to another Hybrid IP-PBXOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different Hybrid IP-PBXs.

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Setting the System LockWhen a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system setting.

Using the KX-TD7680

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedly to select the desired language.

[ F2 ] [ F3 ]

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedlyto select the desiredlanguage.

F2 F3

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

C.Tone

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

S1S1

SEL SEL

C.Tone

Choose "Enable/Disable".Select

"SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

System Lock Password System Lock Password

Installation Manual 365

Page 366: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Using the KX-TD7690

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong Hybrid IP-PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Before registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX, register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX with the matching PIN.

Notes• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the Hybrid IP-PBX and PS.

Therefore, the PS can be registered to the Hybrid IP-PBX without setting the PIN.

• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Therefore, even when there is more than 1 Hybrid IP-PBX with the same PIN near the PS, the PS will not be linked to a different Hybrid IP-PBX during normal operation after registration.

Setting the PIN for Hybrid IP-PBX

Setting the PIN for PS

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

S1 Choose "Enable/Disable".

SEL

ENTR

S1

S1

S1

S1

CHNG

SEL

ENTR

Select "SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

System Lock Password System Lock Password

[692]1 to 4 digits

PIN for PS RegistrationEND

ENTER ENTER1234

Select "CHANGE PIN"

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

Select "CHANGE PIN" S1

ENTR

S1

SEL

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

366 Installation Manual

Page 367: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:

• PS is turned on.

• PS is within the range.

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TD7680

Using the KX-TD7690

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

[691]001 to 028

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

END

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

Select "YES".

C.Tone

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

S1S1

SEL SEL

Select "YES".

C.ToneS1

SEL

Installation Manual 367

Page 368: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

6.8.8 Wall Mounting

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Notes

• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.

• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

368 Installation Manual

Page 369: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

NoteWhen you print out this page, the distance on the paper output may deviate slightly from the measurement indicated above.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

Installation Manual 369

Page 370: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers

A maximum of 4 doorphones (KX-T30865) and 4 door openers can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a DPH4 card. A maximum of 2 doorphones (German type) and 2 door openers can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a DPH2 card.

Notes• KX-T30865 is a Panasonic doorphone.

• German type doorphones and door openers are user-supplied.

Maximum Cabling Distance

Current Limit for door opener: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865)1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.

Doorphone

Door Opener

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 70 mø 0.5 mm: Under 113 mø 0.6 mm: Under 180 mCAT 5: Under 113 m

Panasonic

Screw

370 Installation Manual

Page 371: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.

NoteTwo kinds of screws are included with KX-T30865. Please choose the appropriate kind for your wall type.

3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.

4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.

: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall

: when you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall

Screw

To terminal box

To terminal box

Installation Manual 371

Page 372: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ45 Connectors1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings

and levering the cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.

2. Connect the wires of doorphones to the terminal box.For details about pin assignments for the DPH4 card, refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card".

Terminal Box (included with the card)

DP2

Reserved

com2

ReservedReservedReserved

DP1com1 DP4

ReservedReserved

com4

ReservedReserved

DP3com3

To doorphones

Pin Assignments for Terminal Box

372 Installation Manual

Page 373: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.

4. Make sure to run the connected wires through the opening. Then, close the cover.

Installation Manual 373

Page 374: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH4 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX using the telephone line cords included with the card.

Telephone Line Cord

To DPH4 card

To doorphones

374 Installation Manual

Page 375: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ11 Connectors1. Connect the DPH4 card to the terminal boxes using the telephone line cords included with

the card.Refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card" for pin assignments.

2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.

3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box.

PanasonicPanasonic PanasonicPanasonic

YellowRed

Black

Telephone Line Cord

Telephone Line Cord

Green

Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2

To DPH4 card

Terminal Box (included with the card)

PanasonicPanasonic PanasonicPanasonic

YellowRed

BlackGreen

Installation Manual 375

Page 376: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

Connection of Door Openers and German Type Doorphones to DPH2 Card

1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings and levering the cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.

2. Connect the wires of door openers and doorphones to the terminal box.For details about pin assignments for the DPH2 card, refer to "6.5.2 DPH2 Card".

Terminal Box (included with the card)

Path_1b

OP1b

Call_1a

DC1aOP1aDC1b

Path_1aCall_1b Path_2b

OP2aOP2b

Call_2a

DC2aDC2b

Path_2aCall_2b

Pin Assignments for Terminal Box

To doorphones/door openers

376 Installation Manual

Page 377: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.

4. Make sure to run the connected wires through it. Then, close the cover.

Installation Manual 377

Page 378: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH2 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX using the telephone line cords included with the card.

To doorphones/door openers

Telephone Line Cord

To DPH2 card

378 Installation Manual

Page 379: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.9 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30

Connection of Door Openers to DPH4 CardUse 10-pin terminal block (included with the card) for connection.

1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert the wire into the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other door openers.Refer to "6.5.1 DPH4 Card" for pin assignments.

2. Attach the terminal block to the connector of the DPH4 card in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Door Opener

To door openers

Installation Manual 379

Page 380: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30

6.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30

6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

BGM/MOHThe Hybrid IP-PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Only 1 external music source (e.g., a user-supplied radio) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTION• Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug.

Otherwise, music may intermittent.

• An External Music Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

Note

When the Hybrid IP-PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same earth, hum noise may be induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.

PC Printer

PC

BGM/Music on Hold

Pager:Amplifier/Speaker

Maximum Distance Under 2 m

Maximum Distance Under 5 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 10 mø 0.5 mm: Under 10 mø 0.6 mm: Under 10 mCAT 5: Under 10 m

Cable Maximum Distanceø 0.4 mm: Under 10 mø 0.5 mm: Under 10 mø 0.6 mm: Under 10 mCAT 5: Under 10 m

380 Installation Manual

Page 381: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30

PagerOnly 1 paging device (user-supplied) can be connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTIONAn External Paging Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device, or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

PC/Printer (via RS-232C)The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the user-supplied devices such as PC or line printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming, SMDR, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

Note

Use an RS-232C cross cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and PC.

Pin Assignments

Connection ChartsFor connecting a printer/PC with a 9-pin RS-232C connector

No. Signal Name FunctionCircuit Type

EIA CCITT

2 RD (RXD) Receive Data BB 104

3

4

SD (TXD)

ER (DTR)

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

BA

CD

103

108.2

5

6

SG

DR (DSR)

Signal Ground

Data Set Ready

AB

CC

102

107

7

8

RS (RTS)

CS (CTS)

Request To Send

Clear To Send

CA

CB

105

106

6 9

1 5

Hybrid IP-PBX Printer/PC

Circuit Type(EIA)

SignalName Pin No. Pin No.

SignalName

Circuit Type(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

2 RD (RXD) BB

3 SD (TXD) BA

4 ER (DTR) CD

5 SG AB

6 DR (DSR) CC

7 RS (RTS) CA

8 CS (CTS) CB

Installation Manual 381

Page 382: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30

For connecting a printer/PC with a 25-pin RS-232C connector

RS-232C Signals• Receive Data (RXD):…(input)

Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.

• Transmit Data (TXD):…(output)Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.

• Data Terminal Ready (DTR):…(output)This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.

• Signal Ground (SG)Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.

• Data Set Ready (DSR):…(input)An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit DR (DSR) ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC.

• Request To Send (RTS):…(output)This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.

• Clear To Send (CTS):…(input)An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.

• Frame Ground (FG)Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.

Hybrid IP-PBX Printer/PC

Circuit Type(EIA)

SignalName

Pin No.SignalName

Circuit Type(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

1 FG AA

3 RD (RXD) BB

2 SD (TXD) BA

20 ER (DTR) CD

7 SG AB

5 CS (CTS) CB

6 DR (DSR) CC

CF4 RS (RTS)

Pin No.

382 Installation Manual

Page 383: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.10 Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30

PC/Server PC (via USB version 1.1)The Hybrid IP-PBX is equipped with a USB interface. This interface provides communication between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PC or a Server PC.

The PC is used for system programming, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

The Server PC is used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI. The CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol.

Note

The operating system of the PC or Server PC required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name

1 VBUS

2 USB D-

3 USB D+

4 GND

2

3

1

4

Installation Manual 383

Page 384: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.11 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA30

6.11 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA30

6.11.1 Power Failure Connections

When the power supply to the Hybrid IP-PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Guide for further information.Power Failure Connection is required to implement this feature.

Note

While DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the Hybrid IP-PBX will remain fully operational and the connection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.

Using Analogue Trunk Card and Super Hybrid PortsIn the event of power failure, SLTs connected to Ports 1 and 2 of the Super Hybrid Ports (on the Main Board) are automatically connected to PFT ports 1 and 2 of the first LCOT2/LCOT4 card (installed in the least slot number).

NoteEven when the power returns, the conversation established during power failure will be maintained.

Using BRI2 CardLINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI2 card can be used for Power Failure Connections.

Note

When the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will be dropped.

Accessory and User-supplied ItemsAccessory (included): Extension Bolt × 1, Strap × 1

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connectors

To ISDN extension

RJ45(LINE 1)

RJ45(LINE 2)To NT1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Set all DIP switches at "ON" positions.

384 Installation Manual

Page 385: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.11 Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA30

Switch Settings

RJ45 Connector LINE 1 Pin Assignments

RJ45 Connector LINE 2 Pin Assignments

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

PFT Setting DIP Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and LINE 2 as a PFT port.

LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)

LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)

Signal Name Level [V] Function

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

Installation Manual 385

Page 386: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX

CAUTION• SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the main board

before start up.

• Before touching the System Initialise Switch and the Reset Button, discharge static by touching ground or wearing an earthing strap.

• Once you have started the Hybrid IP-PBX and if you unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX, do not perform the following procedures to start the Hybrid IP-PBX again. Otherwise, your programmed data is cleared. To restart the Hybrid IP-PBX, refer to "8.1.4 Using the Reset Button".

• The Hybrid IP-PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned "OFF".

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device, ensure that the socket-outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.

1. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

Reset Button

System Initialise Switch

RUN Indicator

ALARM Indicator

386 Installation Manual

Page 387: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

2. Plug the DC connector of the AC adaptor into DC IN 1.

Notes• The AC adaptor supplied with the Hybrid IP-PBX must be connected to DC IN 1. If an

AC adaptor is connected only to DC IN 2, the Hybrid IP-PBX will not start.

• If you need to connect an additional AC adaptor, plug the DC connector of the additional AC adaptor into DC IN 2.

AC Adaptor

DC Connector

DC IN 1

21

DC Connector

AdditionalAC Adaptor

DC IN 2

AC Adaptor

1 2

Installation Manual 387

Page 388: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

3. Plug the AC cord into the AC adaptor, and then plug the other end into an AC outlet.

4. Turn on the power switch.

Notes

• For safety reasons, follow the procedures as indicated when turning on the Hybrid IP-PBX.

• For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC cord and the DC cable of the AC adaptor.

5. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool. (The RUN indicator will flash.)

6. While the RUN indicator is flashing (within about 10 s), return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position. Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min to 3 min. If successfully executed, the RUN indicator will stop flashing and be kept lit.

All data will be cleared, and the Hybrid IP-PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for the IP-GW4 card) will be initialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as 01:00.The data of the IP-GW4 card will not be initialised.

Note

Use the same types of AC adaptor and AC cord that are supplied with the Hybrid IP-PBX only.

AC Adaptor

AC Cord

To AC outlet

Power Switch

388 Installation Manual

Page 389: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

LED Indications

Confirming the Trunk ConnectionAfter initialisation, programme the Hybrid IP-PBX and establish trunk connection, and then use a PT to confirm it.

To confirm, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) or press S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the trunk is available and connected.

Turning off the Hybrid IP-PBXFor safety reasons, make sure to turn off the power switch before unplugging the Hybrid IP-PBX. To unplug, follow the reverse steps to plug it in.

Indication Colour Description

RUN Green PBX status indication

• OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)

• ON: Power On and running (on-line)

• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up

• Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:

• the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position

• the SD Memory Card not inserted

ALARM Red Alarm indication

• OFF: Normal

• ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each card)

• Flashing: Alarm (MPR file error in restarting)

Installation Manual 389

Page 390: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

6.12 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30

390 Installation Manual

Page 391: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 7

Guide for the KX-TDA30 MaintenanceConsole — KX-TDA30

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 391

Page 392: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.1 Overview — KX-TDA30

7.1 Overview — KX-TDA30

7.1.1 Overview

KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Hybrid IP-PBX. To programme and administer the Hybrid IP-PBX by PC, you need to install the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console onto the PC.This manual describes overview and installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console only.

KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console*1

*1 The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

Menu Bar

Programme Menu

392 Installation Manual

Page 393: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.2 Connection — KX-TDA30

7.2 Connection — KX-TDA30

7.2.1 Connection

Serial Interface Connection

Note

For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals".

PC

PC

To USB Port

To COM Port

USB Port

RS-232C Port

Installation Manual 393

Page 394: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.2 Connection — KX-TDA30

External Modem Connection

After connecting the Hybrid IP-PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the external modem to "ON", then the external modem will be initialised with the default values.

The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:

• The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.

• The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.

• The data compression should be disabled.

• Error Correction is not necessary.

Notes

• Use an RS-232C straight cable for connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and external modem.

• An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be programmed by KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console. "AT&F0E0V1X1S10=30S12=50" is stored as the default value.

• For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modem’s instructions.

To trunk/Hybrid IP-PBX extensionport assigned as the trunk destination

ModemTo RS-232C port

(25-pin)

External ModemHybrid IP-PBX

Signal Name Pin No.Signal Name

SD (TXD)2

RD (RXD)3

DR (DSR)6

ER (DTR)20

2RD (RXD)

3SD (TXD)

4 ER (DTR)

6DR (DSR)

Pin No.

RS-232C Port(9 pin)

394 Installation Manual

Page 395: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

7.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

System RequirementsOperating System

• Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Hardware• CPU: Intel Pentium 133 MHz or better microprocessor

• RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)

• HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space

Password SecurityA password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password

1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers.

2. Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.

3. Please change the password periodically.

4. We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers.

5. If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised access.

• If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool. For how to back up system data, refer to "7.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".

• If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.

Installation Manual 395

Page 396: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Installing the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropriate Country/Area Data

Notes

• To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".

• To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.

Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)

When you start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will setup the following basic items:

• Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set on the PC will be used.

• System Password for installer for PC programming.

• Operator extension numbers. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/night) can be assigned.

• Flexible Numbering type to pattern 1 or pattern 2. If pattern 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.

• Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers (0 or 9). The feature numbers for operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS can be selected.

• Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX (including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.

1. a. Save the setup file of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console on your PC.

b. Double-click the icon to execute the setup file.

c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

2. a. Type the appropriate Country Code.The KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console will be installed with the appropriate default data for your country/area.

b. Click [Next].

c. Follow the instructions of the wizard.

d. Click [Finish].

e. Click [OK].

396 Installation Manual

Page 397: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a USB cable.

2. Start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console from the start menu.

3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: 1234), then click [OK].

The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code.

NoteThere are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default: 1111), and User Level (default: none).

4. Click "Connect" "USB" from the menu bar.

5. Type the system password for installer (default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.

6. When country/area data do not match:

a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete.

b. Follow the procedure described in "6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX" and restart the Hybrid IP-PBX.

c. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 397

Page 398: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Notice

1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost.To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.

2. When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup memory in the PBX.

3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console is connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX. To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

CAUTIONDo not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.

7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and assign the basic items (Quick Setup).

The programme menu appears.

398 Installation Manual

Page 399: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

7.3.2 Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Menu Bar

File

Connect

Tool

Utility DiagnosisFile Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PCSD Card File View and LoadSD Card File DeleteMessage File Transfer PC to PBXMessage File Transfer PBX to PCError LogISDN/Qsig Protocol TraceCS InformationPS InformationSystem Reset Reset by the Command

Window

Help

Installation Manual 399

Page 400: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

7.3.3 Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration

This section briefly describes how to check the configuration of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.For detailed descriptions of each feature and related PT programming, refer to the on-line help at each screen.

1. Start the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console (refer to "Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "7.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console").

2. To check the slot condition of the Hybrid IP-PBX:

a. Double-click "Configuration".

b. Double-click "Slot".

3. To check the PS status:

a. Double-click "Configuration".

b. Double-click "Portable Station".

4. To check other configurations, double-click the other items in the same manner.

400 Installation Manual

Page 401: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

7.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance

This section briefly describes how to perform maintenance of the Hybrid IP-PBX using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console when PC and the Hybrid IP-PBX are connected by USB cable.For detailed descriptions of each feature and related PT programming, refer to the on-line help at each screen.

1. Start the KX-TDA 30 Maintenance Console (refer to "Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup)" in "7.3.1 Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console").

2. To diagnose a card:Click "Utility" "Diagnosis" from the menu bar.

3. a. Click "Status" of the desired card and change its status to "OUS".

b. Click "Card Type" of the desired card.The diagnosis screen appears.

To use other utility commands, click the desired item in the step 2 above.

Installation Manual 401

Page 402: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) The programme files in the PC are transferred to SD Memory Card of the Hybrid IP-PBX. Programme files in the SD Memory Card is overwritten in this process.

File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC The programme files in the SD Memory Card are transferred to the PC.

SD Card File View and Load The name, date, time, and size of programme files in the SD Memory Card are viewed, then these files are transferred to each CS connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX.

SD Card File Delete The programme files in the SD Memory Card are deleted.

Message File Transfer PC to PBX The message files for Outgoing Messages in the PC are transferred to all MSG cards. Available only when at least 1 MSG card is installed.

Message File Transfer PBX to PC The message files for Outgoing Messages in the MSG cards are transferred to the PC. Available only when at least 1 MSG card is installed.

Error Log The error log is displayed (for details, refer to "8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").

ISDN/Qsig Protocol Trace Displays ISDN protocol trace data of the BRI card.

CS Information Displays the internal information of the CS.

PS Information Displays the registration information of the PS.

System Reset Reset by the Command

Resets the connected Hybrid IP-PBX. (It is the same as pushing the Reset Button with the System Initialise Switch in the "NORMAL" position.) After using this command, you have to restart the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX again.

402 Installation Manual

Page 403: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Section 8

Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

This section provides information on the Hybrid IP-PBX and telephone troubleshooting.

Installation Manual 403

Page 404: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1.1 Installation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Extension does not operate. Bad extension card. Exchange the card for a known working one.

Bad connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and telephone.

Take the telephone and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone works, then the connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the telephone must be repaired.

A telephone with an A-A1 relay is connected.

Use a 2-wire cord.

Set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to the "OUT" or "OFF" position.

Bad telephone. Take the telephone and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the telephone.

The number of terminal equipment exceeds the capacity of the Hybrid IP-PBX with the supplied AC adaptor only.

Connect an additional AC adaptor.

Improper operation. Press the Reset Button (refer to "8.1.4 Using the Reset Button").

Noise on external paging. Induced noise on the wire between the Hybrid IP-PBX and the amplifier.

Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the Hybrid IP-PBX and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.

Distorted external music. Excessive input level from external music source.

Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice and Live Call Screening (LCS) do not function as set when using a Wireless Phone (KX-T7880/KX-T7885/KX-TD7894/KX-TD7895).

Voice-calling mode and Hands-free mode with LCS are not available with Wireless Phones.

Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.

Set the LCS mode to "Private".

The ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red.

A major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX.

See the error log using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console (refer to "8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log").

404 Installation Manual

Page 405: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1.2 Connection

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and a PT:

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT:

Connection between the Hybrid IP-PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:

CAUSEThe T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTIONUse the correct cord (theinner 2 wires are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are for D1/D2).

D1TR

D2

D1 TR D2

Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBX

Extension

CAUSEThe T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTIONUse the correct cord (the inner 2 wires are for T/R).•D1

TR

D2

TR

Extension

CAUSEThe "T" is connected to the "R".

SOLUTIONReverse the connections ofthe T/R.

D1TR

D2

TR

Extension

Can you dialan extension?

(Continued on the next page.)

No

Yes

If a telephone equipped with an A-A1 relay is connected to the Hybrid IP-PBX, set the A-A1 relay switch of the telephone to "OFF".

Installation Manual 405

Page 406: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

Connection between the trunk and the Hybrid IP-PBX:

CAUSETrunk is connected to the T2/T1.

Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

SOLUTIONReconnect the trunk tothe T1/R1 or T2/R2 of thetelephone jack using 2-conductor wiring.

T2 R1T1R2

Trunk Hybrid IP-PBX

Hybrid IP-PBXTrunk

T2 R1T1R2

(Continued from theprevious page.)

Can you dialout on a trunk?

No

406 Installation Manual

Page 407: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1.3 Operation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• When using the speakerphone on an APT, nothing is audible.

• The HANDSET/HEADSET selector is set to the "HEADSET" position.

• When the headset is not used, set the HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the "HANDSET" position.

• When using the speakerphone/monitor mode with a DPT, nothing is audible.

• The "HEADSET" mode is selected by Personal Programming, "Handset/Headset Selection".

• When the headset is not used, select the "HANDSET" mode by Personal Programming.

• The PT does not ring. • The ringer volume is off. • Turn on the ringer volume.

• During a power failure, extensions connected to ports 1 and 2 of Super Hybrid Ports do not operate.

• A DPT or APT is connected to the extension port.

• The dialling mode (tone or pulse) is incorrect.

• Disconnect the DPT or APT and connect an SLT.

• Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other position.

• Originating an outside call, call transfer, or conference cannot be performed.

• The corresponding CO button does not exist on the PT.

• Programme the CO button. Refer to "1.19.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

• Cannot register the PS. • Wrong Personal Identification Number (PIN) is registered to the PS.

• Register the PIN set to the Hybrid IP-PBX into the PS.

• CS is not connected properly.

• Make sure that the cable is connected properly with correct pin assignments. Also, make sure that the cable does not make short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• PS becomes out of range.

• Cannot make calls using the PS.

• CS is not working. • Make sure that the cable is connected properly with correct pin assignments. Also, make sure that the cable does not make short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• Location of CS is not good.

• Locate the CS properly (refer to "6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590" or "6.8.5 Site Survey" ).

• Access system of the PS is not properly set.

• Change the access system setting of the PS to the appropriate system or automatic.

Installation Manual 407

Page 408: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

• Noise is frequent while using the PS.

• Conversations disconnect while using the PS.

• Call handover is not working.

• PS is out of CS coverage area.

• Locate the CS properly (refer to "6.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590" or "6.8.5 Site Survey" ).

• PS stays out of service when the CS status is changed from Out of Service to In Service.

• It may take about 10 s for CS to start up after the status has been changed to In Service.

• Wait until the CS starts up.

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

408 Installation Manual

Page 409: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1.4 Using the Reset Button

If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset Button, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.

Notes

1. When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button causes the following:

• Camp-on is cleared.

• Calls on hold are terminated.

• Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.

• Calls in progress are terminated.

• Call park is cleared.

Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.

2. When the System Initialise Switch is set to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position, you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation: (1) pressing the Reset Button and then, (2) setting the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

Operation1. If the Hybrid IP-PBX does not operate properly:

a. Make sure that the System Initialise Switch is set to the "NORMAL" position.

b. Press the Reset Button.

2. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not operate properly:

a. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

b. Press the Reset Button.

c. Return the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

Note

As a result of Step 2, all the programmed data will be cleared.

Reset Button

System Initialise Switch

RUN Indicator

ALARM Indicator

Installation Manual 409

Page 410: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

3. If the Hybrid IP-PBX still does not work:

a. Unplug the Hybrid IP-PBX.

b. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

c. Plug in the Hybrid IP-PBX after 5 min.

d. Press the Reset Button.

e. Set the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position while the RUN indicator is flashing (within approximately 10 s).

410 Installation Manual

Page 411: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

When a major system error occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.

Error Log Display FormatBelow is the display format of the error log. To see the error log using the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console, refer to "7.3.4 Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance".

Example: KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Description

Item Description

1 Date Date of the error detection

2 Time Time of the error detection

3 Level Major Alarm (MJ ALM):

Errors that affect the whole system operation, or result in system failure

Minor Alarm (MN ALM):

Errors that affect certain part of system operation

4 Error Code Three-digit error code

1 2 4 5 6

3

04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow 04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down 04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #392 10401 Clock master card selected

1 2 3 4 5 6

Installation Manual 411

Page 412: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

5 Sub Code Five-digit sub code (1XXYY)

1: Cabinet number

XX: Slot number

00 to 11 (00: MPR; 01: Super hybrid ports; 02 to 11: Slots for optional service cards)

YY: Physical port number (01 to 16)

For optional service cards that are installed in Slots 08 to 11, sub slot number + port number will be displayed.

Sub slot 1: 11 to 14

NoteWhen there is no parameter for slot and physical port number, XX and YY will be displayed as "00".Example: Sub code for MPR = 10000

6 Error Message Error description (maximum 36 characters)

Item Description

412 Installation Manual

Page 413: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

List of Errors and SolutionsThe tables below list the errors and their solutions.

When an error whose error code is indicated with "*" occurs in the Hybrid IP-PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red, and the system logs the error information.

When the error conditions indicated by the error codes "021", "091", "092", and "510" are recovered, the ALARM indicator will turn off automatically, indicating successful troubleshooting. When other errors are logged, the ALARM indicator will turn off only when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

In other words, the ALARM indicator will turn off under the following conditions:

• When the errors "021", "091", "092", and "510" are logged: when the error conditions are recovered

• When other errors are logged: when the log for major or minor errors is cleared from the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

Optional Service Card Initial Self Diagnosis

System Start-up and On-line Operation

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

212 Echo canceller access error

• Optional service card malfunction: ECHO

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

215 Framer IC access error

• Optional service card malfunction: BRI

216 MSG card DSP error

• Optional service card malfunction: MSG

217 MSG card data error

• Optional service card malfunction: MSG

• Erroneous recording of messages

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Re-record the messages

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

000* MPR WDT overflow

• Main Board (MPR) malfunction

• Erroneous processing of Main Board (MPR) software

• Software error due to external factors

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

001 SDRAM bit error

Installation Manual 413

Page 414: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

002 System Restart • Reset Button is pressed

• Power failure

• Main Board malfunction

• Erroneous processing of Main Board software

• Software error due to external factors

• Ignore if not frequent

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

010 AC power down • AC power down

• Bad connection or breaking of AC cord

• Check the power supply system

• See if the AC cord is connected properly

• Check the AC cord

• Replace the AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

011 DC power down • AC power down

• Power supply circuit (Main Board) malfunction

• Detection of over current (short circuit on optional service cards)

• Check the power supply system

• See if the AC cord is connected properly

• Check the AC cord

• Replace the AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

• Remove the optional service cards and restart the Hybrid IP-PBX

012* MPR RAM battery low

• Battery out

• Main Board (MPR) malfunction

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

013 Additional AC power down

• Additional AC power down

• Bad connection or breaking of additional AC cord

• Check the power supply system

• See if the additional AC cord is connected properly

• Check the additional AC cord

• Replace the additional AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

017 BRI port overload • Defective cable

• Defective ISDN terminal equipment

• Optional service card malfunction: BRI

• Check the cable

• Replace the defective terminal equipment

• Check the number of connected terminal equipment

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

414 Installation Manual

Page 415: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

019 Additional AC power on

• Additional AC power on

• Bad connection or breaking of additional AC cord

• Check the power supply system

• See if the additional AC cord is connected properly

• Check the additional AC cord

• Replace the additional AC cord (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

020* SD file access error

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• Main Board malfunction

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the SD Memory Card

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

021* SD Memory Card disconnected

• SD Memory Card not installed

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• Main Board malfunction

022 Not enough free space on SD card

• Not enough memory space available to save the system data, or to upload system files from the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console

• Delete the files whose file names start with "$" from SD Memory Card

NoteDo not delete the "PSMPR" file; it is the programme file of the Main Board (MPR).

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 415

Page 416: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

023 System data file version error

• Old system files on SD Memory Card

• Defective system files on SD Memory Card

• Restore the backup files

• Re-install the software

024 System initialization file version error

025 Card initialization file version error

026 LCD file version error

027 System data file checksum error

028 System initialization file checksum error

029 Card initialization file checksum error

030 LCD file checksum error

031* System data file not found

• SD Memory Card not installed

• Bad connection of SD Memory Card

• SD Memory Card malfunction

• Main Board malfunction

• Press the Reset Button

• Reprogramme the Hybrid IP-PBX

• Replace the SD Memory Card

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

032* System initialization file not found

033* Card initialization file not found

034* LCD file not found

035 System data file access error

036* System initialization file access error

037* Card initialization file access error

038* LCD file access error

090 Over Card Limitation

• Too many optional service cards installed

• Reduce the number of optional service cards

091* PT connection over

• Too many PTs connected

• Reduce the number of PTs

092* CS connection over

• Too many CSs connected

• Reduce the number of CSs

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

416 Installation Manual

Page 417: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

230* Card disconnected

• Optional service card not installed properly

• Optional service card malfunction

• Main Board malfunction

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

234 DPLL clock failure • Optional service card malfunction: DLC, BRI, IP-GW

• Main Board (MPR) malfunction

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Pull out and re-insert the corresponding optional service card

• Press the Reset Button

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Replace the Main Board (be sure to turn off the Hybrid IP-PBX when replacing)

251 MSG DSP failure • Optional service card malfunction: MSG

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

305* Data Link failure • Data link between the CS and Hybrid IP-PBX failed

• Data link between the network and BRI/IP-GW card failed

• Check the connection between the CS and Hybrid IP-PBX

• Check the connection between the network and BRI/IP-GW card

307 LAN No Carrier • IP-GW card not connected to the LAN

• Check the connection between the LAN and IP-GW card

308 IP-GW LAN Loop back Error

• Detection of IP-GW LAN Loop back Test error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

309 IP-GW Core Data Link Error

• Detection of IP-GW Core data Link error

• Press the Reset Button

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

310* Port Link Failure • Voice Processing System malfunction

• Ports defective on optional service card: DLC

• Check the Voice Processing System

• See if the corresponding optional service card is installed properly

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 417

Page 418: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

320 IP-GW H.323 Dummy Call Test Error

• Detection of IP-GW H.323 Dummy Call Test error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

321 IP-GW Gatekeeper Error

• Detection of Gatekeeper access error

• Check the IP address setting of Gatekeeper

• Check whether the Gatekeeper is connected to the network and work properly

• Check the route to the Gatekeeper

322 IP-GW Gatekeeper Registration Error

• Gatekeeper Registration is failed

• Check the Gatekeeper setting

323 IP-GW SDRAM Failure

• Detection of IP-GW SDRAM error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

324 IP-GW DPRAM Failure

• Detection of IP-GW DPRAM error

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

325 IP-GW LAN Chip Failure

• Detection of IP-GW LAN Tip failure

• Replace the corresponding optional service card

• Collect the log data of IP-GW (refer to the documentation for the IP-GW card)

326 IP-GW Stop • IP-GW is stopped from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is stopped from a remote maintenance PC

370 IP-GW Rebooted by Maintenance Console

• IP-GW is rebooted from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is rebooted from a remote maintenance PC

371 IP-GW Rebooted • Optional service card malfunction: IP-GW

• Check whether the software version of the IP-GW card is correct

391 Data Link established

• Connection with PC Phone/PC Console or Voice Processing System (DPT Integration) established or restored

• This information is logged when connection with PC Phone/PC Console or Voice Processing System (DPT Integration) is established, and does not indicate an error condition that needs to be solved.However, if this is logged frequently (with "305 Data Link failure"), check the connection as it may not be done properly.

392 Clock master card selected

• Clock master card has been changed to the one indicated by the sub code

• Check if the proper card is selected as the new clock master card

393 LAN Carrier detected

• IP-GW card connected to the LAN

• This information is logged when synchronisation of LAN is established

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

418 Installation Manual

Page 419: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

394 IP-GW Core Data Link established

• IP-GW Core Data Link established

• This information is logged when IP-GW Core Data Link is recovered

395 IP-GW Gatekeeper Error Cleared

• Connection to the Gatekeeper is recovered

• This information is logged when connection to the Gatekeeper is recovered

396 IP-GW Run • IP-GW is started from a remote maintenance PC

• This information is logged when IP-GW is started from a remote maintenance PC

510* SMDR disconnect • RS-232C cable not connected

• Breaking of RS-232C cable

• Printer (terminal equipment) malfunction

• Check the RS-232C cable

• Check the terminal equipment

Error Code Error Message PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Installation Manual 419

Page 420: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

8.1 Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30

420 Installation Manual

Page 421: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Installation Manual 421

Index

Page 422: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Index

Numerics16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA0166) 27, 12316-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0181) 28, 7316-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA0172) 27, 11116-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (KX-TDA0174) 27,

11516-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card (KX-

TDA0175) 28, 1151-Port BRI Trunk Card (KX-TDA3283) 242, 2892-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA3191) 241, 3072-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA3183) 241, 2832-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA3280) 242, 2862-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (KX-TDA0162) 27, 1202-Port Doorphone Card (German Type)(KX-TDA3162) 241, 3034 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0144) 27, 1044-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA0191) 28, 1244-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA0480) 29, 994-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA0484) 29, 1024-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA3480) 242, 2924-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0183) 28, 734-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA3180) 241, 2814-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA0284) 28, 884-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3193) 241, 2854-Port DID Card (KX-TDA3182) 241, 2844-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA3171) 241, 2944-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA0161) 27, 1184-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA3161) 241, 3004-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (KX-TDA3173) 241,

2968 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0144) 27, 1048-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA3166) 241, 3068-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0180) 28, 738-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA0288) 29, 888-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA0193) 28, 788-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (KX-TDA0189) 28, 778-Port DID Card (KX-TDA0182) 28, 758-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA0171) 27, 1098-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA3172) 241, 2978-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (KX-TDA0170) 27, 1068-Port E & M Trunk Card (KX-TDA0184) 28, 798-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (KX-TDA0173) 27,

1138-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (KX-TDA3174) 241,

299

AAbout the Other Manuals 11AC Adaptor Capability 247AC Adaptor Selection 247Additional AC Adaptor (KX-A236) 242After Site Survey 152, 178, 338, 361Amphenol Connector Pin Assignment Chart 58Attaching a Ferrite Core 55

BBackup Batteries Connection 47, 259Basic Shelf 24Basic System Construction — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 24Basic System Construction — KX-TDA30 238

Before Installation 36, 250Before Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 36Before Installation — KX-TDA30 250Before Site Survey 144, 172, 330, 355BRI1 Card 289BRI2 Card 286BRI4 and BRI8 Cards 88Built-in Small Call Centre Features 22, 236

CCharacteristics 32, 245CID/PAY8 Card 77CID4 Card 285CID8 Card 78Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features 22, 236Confirming the Trunk Connection 202, 389Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 153, 179, 339,

362Connection 205, 219, 393, 405Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

164Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30 348Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

136Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30 322Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 189Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers — KX-TDA30 370Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 127Connection of Extensions — KX-TDA30 313Connection of Peripherals 192, 380Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 192Connection of Peripherals — KX-TDA30 380Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 205Connection — KX-TDA30 393Construction of Basic Shelf 24Construction of Main Unit 238Covering the Blank Slots 50CSIF4 and CSIF8 Card 104CTI Link Card (KX-TDA0410) 29, 125CTI-LINK Card 125CTI—First Party Call Control 135, 321CTI—Third Party Call Control 125, 195, 383

DDHLC8 Card 106DID4 Card 284DID8 Card 75Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection 130, 316Digital XDP 130, 316DLC16 Card 111DLC4 Card 294DLC8 Card 109, 297Door Opener 118, 120, 189, 300, 303, 370Doorphone 118, 120, 189, 300, 303, 370DPH2 Card 120, 303DPH4 Card 118, 300

422 Installation Manual

Page 423: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Index

EE&M8 Card 79E1 Card 85E-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0188) 28, 85ECHO16 Card 123ECHO8 Card 306EXT-CID Card 308Extension Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3168) 241, 308EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode 128, 130, 314, 316

FFastening Amphenol Type Connector 57First Party Call Control CTI Connection 135, 321Floor Standing (KX-TDA200 Only) 63Frame Earth Connection 46, 258

GGeneral Description 30, 243Guide for the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 203Guide for the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console — KX-TDA30 391

HHandling of the Cables 51, 266Hybrid IP-PBX Configuration 212, 400Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance 213, 401

IInstallation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 104Installation of the Extension Cards — KX-TDA30 294Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 38Installation of the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30 252Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200 207Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console 395Installation of the Main Processing Card — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

69Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 117Installation of the Other Cards — KX-TDA30 300Installation of the SD Memory Card 257Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 73Installation of the Trunk Cards — KX-TDA30 281Installation Precautions 36, 250Installation — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 35Installation — KX-TDA30 249Installing and Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console 207Installing and Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console 395Installing the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropriate

Country/Area Data 208Installing the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Selecting Appropri-

ate Country/Area Data 396Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards 48, 260Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit 42IP-GW4 Card 99, 292IP-GW4E Card 102

KKX-A236 (Additional AC Adaptor) 242KX-TDA0103 (L-Type Power Supply Unit) 29, 42KX-TDA0104 (M-Type Power Supply Unit) 29, 42KX-TDA0105 (Memory Expansion Card) 27, 71KX-TDA0108 (S-Type Power Supply Unit) 29, 42KX-TDA0144 (4 Cell Station Interface Card) 27, 104KX-TDA0144 (8 Cell Station Interface Card) 27, 104KX-TDA0161 (4-Port Doorphone Card) 27, 118KX-TDA0162 (2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type)) 27, 120KX-TDA0166 (16-Channel Echo Canceller Card) 27, 123KX-TDA0170 (8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card) 27, 106KX-TDA0171 (8-Port Digital Extension Card) 27, 109KX-TDA0172 (16-Port Digital Extension Card) 27, 111KX-TDA0173 (8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) 27,

113KX-TDA0174 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) 27,

115KX-TDA0175 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message

Lamp Card) 28, 115KX-TDA0180 (8-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 28, 73KX-TDA0181 (16-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 28, 73KX-TDA0182 (8-Port DID Card) 28, 75KX-TDA0183 (4-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 28, 73KX-TDA0184 (8-Port E & M Trunk Card) 28, 79KX-TDA0187 (T-1 Trunk Card) 28, 82KX-TDA0188 (E-1 Trunk Card) 28, 85KX-TDA0189 (8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card) 28, 77KX-TDA0190 (Optional 3-Slot Base Card) 28, 117KX-TDA0191 (4-Channel Message Card) 28, 124KX-TDA0193 (8-Port Caller ID Card) 28, 78KX-TDA0196 (Remote Card) 28, 72KX-TDA0284 (4-Port BRI Card) 28, 88KX-TDA0288 (8-Port BRI Card) 29, 88KX-TDA0290 (PRI Card [PRI23]) 29, 96KX-TDA0290CE/CJ (PRI Card [PRI30]) 29, 92KX-TDA0410 (CTI Link Card) 29, 125KX-TDA0480 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 29, 99KX-TDA0484 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 29, 102KX-TDA3105 (Memory Expansion Card) 241, 309KX-TDA3161 (4-Port Doorphone Card) 241, 300KX-TDA3162 (2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type)) 241, 303KX-TDA3166 (8-Channel Echo Canceller Card) 241, 306KX-TDA3168 (Extension Caller ID Card) 241, 308KX-TDA3171 (4-Port Digital Extension Card) 241, 294KX-TDA3172 (8-Port Digital Extension Card) 241, 297KX-TDA3173 (4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) 241,

296KX-TDA3174 (8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card) 241,

299KX-TDA3180 (4-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 241, 281KX-TDA3182 (4-Port DID Card) 241, 284KX-TDA3183 (2-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 241, 283KX-TDA3191 (2-Channel Message Card) 241, 307KX-TDA3193 (4-Port Caller ID Card) 241, 285KX-TDA3196 (Remote Card) 242, 311KX-TDA3280 (2-Port BRI Card) 242, 286KX-TDA3283 (2-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 242, 289KX-TDA3480 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 242, 292

Installation Manual 423

Page 424: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Index

LLCOT2 Card 283LCOT4 Card 281LCOT4, LCOT8, and LCOT16 Cards 73Lightning Protector Installation 66, 278L-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0103) 29, 42

MMain Unit 238Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

127, 313Maximum Terminal Equipment 33, 246Maximum Trunk and Extension Cards 33Maximum Trunk and VoIP Line 246MEC Card 71, 309Memory Expansion Card (KX-TDA0105) 27, 71Memory Expansion Card (KX-TDA3105) 241, 309MPR Card 69MSG2 Card 307MSG4 Card 124M-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0104) 29, 42

NNames and Locations 39, 253Networking Features 22, 236

OOPB3 Card 117Opening/Closing the Covers 254Opening/Closing the Front Cover 40Operation 221, 407Optional 3-Slot Base Card (KX-TDA0190) 28, 117Options 27, 241Options — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 27Options — KX-TDA30 241Overview 136, 164, 204, 322, 348, 392Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 204Overview — KX-TDA30 392

PParallel Connection of the Extensions 128, 314Parallel Mode 128, 130, 314, 316Parallelled Telephone Features 23, 237Password Security 207, 395PC Phone/PC Console Features 23, 237Portable Station (PS) Features 23, 237Power Failure Connections 196, 384Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 196Power Failure Connections — KX-TDA30 384Power Supply Unit Selection 34PRI Card (PRI23) (KX-TDA0290) 29, 96PRI Card (PRI30) (KX-TDA0290CE/CJ) 29, 92PRI23 Card 96PRI30 Card 92Procedure Overview 138, 166, 324, 349

RRecommended Lightning Protectors 66, 278Remote Card (KX-TDA0196) 28, 72Remote Card (KX-TDA3196) 242, 311Removing/Attaching the Front Cover 255RF Specification 136, 322RMT Card 72, 311

SSafety Installation Instructions 36, 250Safety Instructions 42SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 6SD Memory Card 69, 257Site Planning 140, 168, 326, 351Site Survey 174, 357Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TD7590 148, 334SLC16 and MSLC16 Cards 115SLC4 Card 296SLC8 Card 113, 299Slot Position 260Slot Restrictions 260Specifications — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 30Specifications — KX-TDA30 243Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX 200, 386Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 200Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX — KX-TDA30 386Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic

Items (Quick Setup) 208Starting the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic

Items (Quick Setup) 396Structure of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console 211Structure of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console 399S-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0108) 29, 42System Capacity 33, 246System Components Table for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 2System Components Table for KX-TDA30 3System Connection Diagram 25, 239System Highlights 22, 236System Highlights — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 22System Highlights — KX-TDA30 236System Outline — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 21System Outline — KX-TDA30 235

TT1 Card 82T-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0187) 28, 82The Structure of this Manual 11Troubleshooting by Error Log 225, 411Troubleshooting — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 217, 218Troubleshooting — KX-TDA30 403, 404Turning off the Hybrid IP-PBX 389Types of Connectors 53, 270

UUnpacking 38, 252Using a CSIF Card 153, 179Using a DHLC/DLC Card 154, 180Using a Modular T-Adaptor 128, 130, 132, 314, 316, 318

424 Installation Manual

Page 425: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Index

Using an EXtra Device Port 129, 315Using the Reset Button 223, 409

VVoice Mail Features 22, 236

WWall Mounting (AC Adaptor) 275Wall Mounting (CS) 162, 187, 346, 368Wall Mounting (KX-TDA100) 61Wall Mounting (KX-TDA200) 59Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30) 272Wiring Precautions 36, 250

Installation Manual 425

Page 426: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Index

426 Installation Manual

Page 427: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

250

mm

240

mm

65 mm

130 mm

120

mm

Reference for Wall Mounting

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

Page 428: Pan KXTA100-200 Installation Manual 12MB

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC). You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC.

© 2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

PSQX2633WA KK0103AH3034 (Version 0.02)